Fix thinkos in the description of the --hash-size command line option for GAS.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
239 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
240 [@b{--statistics}]
241 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
242 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
243 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
244 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
245 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
246 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
247 @c
248 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
249 @c Add an empty line for separation.
250 @ifset AARCH64
251
252 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
253 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
254 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
255 @end ifset
256 @ifset ALPHA
257
258 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
259 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
260 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
261 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
262 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
263 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
264 @end ifset
265 @ifset ARC
266
267 @emph{Target ARC options:}
268 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
269 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
270 @end ifset
271 @ifset ARM
272
273 @emph{Target ARM options:}
274 @c Don't document the deprecated options
275 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
276 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
277 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
278 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
279 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
280 [@b{-mthumb}]
281 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
282 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
283 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
284 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
285 @end ifset
286 @ifset Blackfin
287
288 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
289 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
290 [@b{-mfdpic}]
291 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
292 [@b{-mnopic}]
293 @end ifset
294 @ifset CRIS
295
296 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
297 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
298 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
299 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
300 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
301 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
302 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
303 @end ifset
304 @ifset D10V
305
306 @emph{Target D10V options:}
307 [@b{-O}]
308 @end ifset
309 @ifset D30V
310
311 @emph{Target D30V options:}
312 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
313 @end ifset
314 @ifset EPIPHANY
315
316 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
317 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
318 @end ifset
319 @ifset H8
320
321 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
322 [-h-tick-hex]
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset HPPA
325 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
326 @end ifset
327 @ifset I80386
328
329 @emph{Target i386 options:}
330 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
331 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
332 @end ifset
333 @ifset I960
334
335 @emph{Target i960 options:}
336 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
337 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
338 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
339 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
340 @end ifset
341 @ifset IA64
342
343 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
344 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
345 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
346 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
347 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
348 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
349 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
350 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
351 @end ifset
352 @ifset IP2K
353
354 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
355 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
356 @end ifset
357 @ifset M32C
358
359 @emph{Target M32C options:}
360 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
361 @end ifset
362 @ifset M32R
363
364 @emph{Target M32R options:}
365 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
366 @b{--W[n]p}]
367 @end ifset
368 @ifset M680X0
369
370 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
371 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
372 @end ifset
373 @ifset M68HC11
374
375 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
376 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
377 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
378 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
379 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
380 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
381 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
382 @end ifset
383 @ifset MCORE
384
385 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
386 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
387 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
388 @end ifset
389 @ifset METAG
390
391 @emph{Target Meta options:}
392 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
393 @end ifset
394 @ifset MICROBLAZE
395 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
396 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
397 @end ifset
398 @ifset MIPS
399
400 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
401 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
402 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
403 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
404 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
405 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
406 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
407 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
408 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
409 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
410 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
411 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
412 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
413 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
414 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
415 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
416 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
417 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
418 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
419 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
420 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
421 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
422 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
423 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
424 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
425 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
426 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
427 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
428 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
429 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
430 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
431 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
432 @end ifset
433 @ifset MMIX
434
435 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
436 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
437 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
438 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
439 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
440 @end ifset
441 @ifset NIOSII
442
443 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
444 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
445 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
446 @end ifset
447 @ifset NDS32
448
449 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
450 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
451 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
452 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
453 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
454 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
455 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
456 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
457 [@b{-mb2bb}]
458 @end ifset
459 @ifset PDP11
460
461 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
462 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
463 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
464 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
465 @end ifset
466 @ifset PJ
467
468 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
469 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
470 @end ifset
471 @ifset PPC
472
473 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
474 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
475 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
476 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
477 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
478 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
479 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
480 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
481 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
482 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
483 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
484 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
485 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
486 @end ifset
487 @ifset RL78
488
489 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
490 [@b{-mg10}]
491 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
492 @end ifset
493 @ifset RX
494
495 @emph{Target RX options:}
496 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
497 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
498 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
499 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
500 [@b{-mpid}]
501 [@b{-mrelax}]
502 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
503 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
504 @end ifset
505 @ifset S390
506
507 @emph{Target s390 options:}
508 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
509 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
510 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
511 @end ifset
512 @ifset SCORE
513
514 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
515 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
516 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
517 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
518 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
519 @end ifset
520 @ifset SPARC
521
522 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
523 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
524 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
525 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
526 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
527 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
528 @end ifset
529 @ifset TIC54X
530
531 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
532 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
533 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
534 @end ifset
535 @ifset TIC6X
536
537 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
538 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
539 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
540 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
541 @end ifset
542 @ifset TILEGX
543
544 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
545 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
546 @end ifset
547 @ifset TILEPRO
548 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
549 @end ifset
550 @ifset VISIUM
551
552 @emph{Target Visium options:}
553 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
554 @end ifset
555 @ifset XTENSA
556
557 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
558 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
559 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
560 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
561 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
562 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
563 @end ifset
564 @ifset Z80
565
566 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
567 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
568 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
569 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
570 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
571 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
572 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
573 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
574 @end ifset
575 @ifset Z8000
576
577 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
578 @end ifset
579
580 @c man end
581 @end smallexample
582
583 @c man begin OPTIONS
584
585 @table @gcctabopt
586 @include at-file.texi
587
588 @item -a[cdghlmns]
589 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
590
591 @table @gcctabopt
592 @item -ac
593 omit false conditionals
594
595 @item -ad
596 omit debugging directives
597
598 @item -ag
599 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
600
601 @item -ah
602 include high-level source
603
604 @item -al
605 include assembly
606
607 @item -am
608 include macro expansions
609
610 @item -an
611 omit forms processing
612
613 @item -as
614 include symbols
615
616 @item =file
617 set the name of the listing file
618 @end table
619
620 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
621 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
622 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
623
624 @item --alternate
625 Begin in alternate macro mode.
626 @ifclear man
627 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
628 @end ifclear
629
630 @item --compress-debug-sections
631 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
632 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
633 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
634 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
635
636 @ifset ELF
637 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
638 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
639 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
640 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
641 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
642 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
643 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
644 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
645 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
646 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
647 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
648 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
649 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
650 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
651 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
652
653 @end ifset
654
655 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
656 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
657
658 @item -D
659 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
660 other assemblers.
661
662 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
663 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
664 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
665
666 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
667 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
668 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
669 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
670 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
671 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
672
673 @item -f
674 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
675 compiler output).
676
677 @item -g
678 @itemx --gen-debug
679 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
680 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
681 ECOFF or DWARF2.
682
683 @item --gstabs
684 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
685 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
686
687 @item --gstabs+
688 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
689 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
690 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
691 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
692 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
693
694 @item --gdwarf-2
695 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
696 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
697 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
698
699 @item --gdwarf-sections
700 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
701 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
702 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
703 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
704 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
705 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
706 suffix.
707
708 @item --size-check=error
709 @itemx --size-check=warning
710 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
711
712 @item --help
713 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
714
715 @item --target-help
716 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
717
718 @item -I @var{dir}
719 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
720
721 @item -J
722 Don't warn about signed overflow.
723
724 @item -K
725 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
726 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
727 @end ifclear
728 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
729 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
730 @end ifset
731
732 @item -L
733 @itemx --keep-locals
734 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
735 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
736 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
737 @ifclear man
738 @xref{Symbol Names}.
739 @end ifclear
740
741 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
742 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
743 listing to @var{number}.
744
745 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
746 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
747 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
748
749 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
750 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
751 @var{number} bytes.
752
753 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
754 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
755 to @var{number} + 1.
756
757 @item -o @var{objfile}
758 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
759
760 @item -R
761 Fold the data section into the text section.
762
763 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
764 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
765 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
766 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
767 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
768 requirements at the expense of speed.
769
770 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
771 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
772 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
773 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
774
775 @ifset ELF
776 @item --sectname-subst
777 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
778 @ifclear man
779 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
780 @end ifclear
781 @end ifset
782
783 @item --statistics
784 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
785 assembly.
786
787 @item --strip-local-absolute
788 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
789
790 @item -v
791 @itemx -version
792 Print the @command{as} version.
793
794 @item --version
795 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
796
797 @item -W
798 @itemx --no-warn
799 Suppress warning messages.
800
801 @item --fatal-warnings
802 Treat warnings as errors.
803
804 @item --warn
805 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
806
807 @item -w
808 Ignored.
809
810 @item -x
811 Ignored.
812
813 @item -Z
814 Generate an object file even after errors.
815
816 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
817 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
818
819 @end table
820 @c man end
821
822 @ifset AARCH64
823
824 @ifclear man
825 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
826 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
827 @end ifclear
828
829 @ifset man
830 @c man begin OPTIONS
831 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
832 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
833 @c man end
834 @c man begin INCLUDE
835 @include c-aarch64.texi
836 @c ended inside the included file
837 @end ifset
838
839 @end ifset
840
841 @ifset ALPHA
842
843 @ifclear man
844 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
845 for an Alpha processor.
846 @end ifclear
847
848 @ifset man
849 @c man begin OPTIONS
850 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
851 processor.
852 @c man end
853 @c man begin INCLUDE
854 @include c-alpha.texi
855 @c ended inside the included file
856 @end ifset
857
858 @end ifset
859
860 @c man begin OPTIONS
861 @ifset ARC
862 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
863 an ARC processor.
864
865 @table @gcctabopt
866 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
867 This option selects the core processor variant.
868 @item -EB | -EL
869 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
870 @end table
871 @end ifset
872
873 @ifset ARM
874 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
875 processor family.
876
877 @table @gcctabopt
878 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
879 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
880 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
881 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
882 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
883 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
884 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
885 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
886 @item -mthumb
887 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
888 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
889 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
890 @item -EB | -EL
891 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
892 @item -mthumb-interwork
893 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
894 ARM code in mind.
895 @item -mccs
896 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
897 @item -k
898 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
899 @end table
900 @end ifset
901 @c man end
902
903 @ifset Blackfin
904
905 @ifclear man
906 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
907 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
908 @end ifclear
909
910 @ifset man
911 @c man begin OPTIONS
912 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
913 the Blackfin processor family.
914 @c man end
915 @c man begin INCLUDE
916 @include c-bfin.texi
917 @c ended inside the included file
918 @end ifset
919
920 @end ifset
921
922 @c man begin OPTIONS
923 @ifset CRIS
924 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
925 @end ifset
926
927 @ifset D10V
928 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
929 a D10V processor.
930 @table @gcctabopt
931 @cindex D10V optimization
932 @cindex optimization, D10V
933 @item -O
934 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
935 @end table
936 @end ifset
937
938 @ifset D30V
939 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
940 processor.
941 @table @gcctabopt
942 @cindex D30V optimization
943 @cindex optimization, D30V
944 @item -O
945 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
946
947 @cindex D30V nops
948 @item -n
949 Warn when nops are generated.
950
951 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
952 @item -N
953 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
954 @end table
955 @end ifset
956 @c man end
957
958 @ifset EPIPHANY
959 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
960 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
961
962 @ifclear man
963 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
964 configured for an Epiphany processor.
965 @end ifclear
966
967 @ifset man
968 @c man begin OPTIONS
969 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
970 an Epiphany processor.
971 @c man end
972 @c man begin INCLUDE
973 @include c-epiphany.texi
974 @c ended inside the included file
975 @end ifset
976
977 @end ifset
978
979 @ifset H8300
980
981 @ifclear man
982 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
983 for an H8/300 processor.
984 @end ifclear
985
986 @ifset man
987 @c man begin OPTIONS
988 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
989 processor.
990 @c man end
991 @c man begin INCLUDE
992 @include c-h8300.texi
993 @c ended inside the included file
994 @end ifset
995
996 @end ifset
997
998 @ifset I80386
999
1000 @ifclear man
1001 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1002 configured for an i386 processor.
1003 @end ifclear
1004
1005 @ifset man
1006 @c man begin OPTIONS
1007 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1008 an i386 processor.
1009 @c man end
1010 @c man begin INCLUDE
1011 @include c-i386.texi
1012 @c ended inside the included file
1013 @end ifset
1014
1015 @end ifset
1016
1017 @c man begin OPTIONS
1018 @ifset I960
1019 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1020 Intel 80960 processor.
1021
1022 @table @gcctabopt
1023 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1024 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1025
1026 @item -b
1027 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1028
1029 @item -no-relax
1030 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1031 error if necessary.
1032
1033 @end table
1034 @end ifset
1035
1036 @ifset IP2K
1037 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1038 Ubicom IP2K series.
1039
1040 @table @gcctabopt
1041
1042 @item -mip2022ext
1043 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1044
1045 @item -mip2022
1046 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1047 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1048
1049 @end table
1050 @end ifset
1051
1052 @ifset M32C
1053 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1054 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1055
1056 @table @gcctabopt
1057
1058 @item -m32c
1059 Assemble M32C instructions.
1060
1061 @item -m16c
1062 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1063
1064 @item -relax
1065 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1066
1067 @item -h-tick-hex
1068 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1069
1070 @end table
1071 @end ifset
1072
1073 @ifset M32R
1074 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1075 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1076
1077 @table @gcctabopt
1078
1079 @item --m32rx
1080 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1081 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1082
1083 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1084 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1085 encountered.
1086
1087 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1088 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1089 encountered.
1090
1091 @end table
1092 @end ifset
1093
1094 @ifset M680X0
1095 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1096 Motorola 68000 series.
1097
1098 @table @gcctabopt
1099
1100 @item -l
1101 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1102
1103 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1104 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1105 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1106 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1107 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1108
1109 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1110 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1111 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1112 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1113 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1114 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1115
1116 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1117 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1118 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1119
1120 @end table
1121 @end ifset
1122
1123 @ifset NIOSII
1124
1125 @ifclear man
1126 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1127 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1128 @end ifclear
1129
1130 @ifset man
1131 @c man begin OPTIONS
1132 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1133 Altera Nios II processor.
1134 @c man end
1135 @c man begin INCLUDE
1136 @include c-nios2.texi
1137 @c ended inside the included file
1138 @end ifset
1139 @end ifset
1140
1141 @ifset PDP11
1142
1143 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1144 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1145
1146 @table @gcctabopt
1147 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1148 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1149 default is @option{-mpic}.
1150
1151 @item -mall
1152 @itemx -mall-extensions
1153 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1154
1155 @item -mno-extensions
1156 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1157
1158 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1159 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1160
1161 @item -m@var{cpu}
1162 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1163 disable all other extensions.
1164
1165 @item -m@var{machine}
1166 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1167 model, and disable all other extensions.
1168 @end table
1169
1170 @end ifset
1171
1172 @ifset PJ
1173 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1174 a picoJava processor.
1175
1176 @table @gcctabopt
1177
1178 @cindex PJ endianness
1179 @cindex endianness, PJ
1180 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1181 @item -mb
1182 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1183
1184 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1185 @item -ml
1186 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1187
1188 @end table
1189 @end ifset
1190
1191 @ifset M68HC11
1192 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1193 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1194
1195 @table @gcctabopt
1196
1197 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1198 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1199 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1200
1201 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1202 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1203 XGATE address space.
1204
1205 @item -mshort
1206 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1207
1208 @item -mlong
1209 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1210
1211 @item -mshort-double
1212 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1213
1214 @item -mlong-double
1215 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1216
1217 @item --force-long-branches
1218 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1219 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1220 sub routine.
1221
1222 @item -S | --short-branches
1223 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1224 when the offset is out of range.
1225
1226 @item --strict-direct-mode
1227 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1228 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1229
1230 @item --print-insn-syntax
1231 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1232
1233 @item --print-opcodes
1234 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1235
1236 @item --generate-example
1237 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1238 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1239
1240 @end table
1241 @end ifset
1242
1243 @ifset SPARC
1244 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1245 for the SPARC architecture:
1246
1247 @table @gcctabopt
1248 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1249 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1250 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1251
1252 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1253 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1254
1255 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1256 UltraSPARC extensions.
1257
1258 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1259 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1260 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1261
1262 @item -bump
1263 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1264 @end table
1265 @end ifset
1266
1267 @ifset TIC54X
1268 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1269 architecture.
1270
1271 @table @gcctabopt
1272 @item -mfar-mode
1273 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1274 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1275 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1276 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1277 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1278 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1279 behaviour in the shell.
1280 @end table
1281 @end ifset
1282
1283 @ifset MIPS
1284 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1285 a MIPS processor.
1286
1287 @table @gcctabopt
1288 @item -G @var{num}
1289 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1290 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1291 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1292
1293 @cindex MIPS endianness
1294 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1295 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1296 @item -EB
1297 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1298
1299 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1300 @item -EL
1301 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1302
1303 @cindex MIPS ISA
1304 @item -mips1
1305 @itemx -mips2
1306 @itemx -mips3
1307 @itemx -mips4
1308 @itemx -mips5
1309 @itemx -mips32
1310 @itemx -mips32r2
1311 @itemx -mips32r3
1312 @itemx -mips32r5
1313 @itemx -mips32r6
1314 @itemx -mips64
1315 @itemx -mips64r2
1316 @itemx -mips64r3
1317 @itemx -mips64r5
1318 @itemx -mips64r6
1319 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1320 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1321 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1322 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1323 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1324 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1325 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1326 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1327 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1328 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1329
1330 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1331 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1332
1333 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1334 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1335
1336 @item -mfix7000
1337 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1338 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1339 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1340
1341 @item -mfix-rm7000
1342 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1343 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1344 followed by a load instruction.
1345
1346 @item -mdebug
1347 @itemx -no-mdebug
1348 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1349 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1350
1351 @item -mpdr
1352 @itemx -mno-pdr
1353 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1354
1355 @item -mgp32
1356 @itemx -mfp32
1357 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1358 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1359 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1360 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1361
1362 @item -mgp64
1363 @itemx -mfp64
1364 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1365 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1366 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1367 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1368
1369 @item -mfpxx
1370 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1371 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1372 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1373 32 or 64 bits wide.
1374
1375 @item -modd-spreg
1376 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1377 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1378 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1379 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1380
1381 @item -mips16
1382 @itemx -no-mips16
1383 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1384 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1385 turns off this option.
1386
1387 @item -mmicromips
1388 @itemx -mno-micromips
1389 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1390 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1391 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1392 at the start of the assembly file.
1393
1394 @item -msmartmips
1395 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1396 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1397 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1398 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1399
1400 @item -mips3d
1401 @itemx -no-mips3d
1402 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1403 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1404 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1405
1406 @item -mdmx
1407 @itemx -no-mdmx
1408 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1409 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1410 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1411
1412 @item -mdsp
1413 @itemx -mno-dsp
1414 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1415 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1416 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1417
1418 @item -mdspr2
1419 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1420 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1421 This option implies -mdsp.
1422 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1423 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1424
1425 @item -mmsa
1426 @itemx -mno-msa
1427 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1428 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1429 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1430
1431 @item -mxpa
1432 @itemx -mno-xpa
1433 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1434 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1435 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1436
1437 @item -mmt
1438 @itemx -mno-mt
1439 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1440 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1441 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1442
1443 @item -mmcu
1444 @itemx -mno-mcu
1445 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1446 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1447 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1448
1449 @item -minsn32
1450 @itemx -mno-insn32
1451 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1452 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1453 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1454 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1455 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1456 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1457 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1458
1459 @item --construct-floats
1460 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1461 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1462 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1463 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1464 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1465 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1466
1467 @item --relax-branch
1468 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1469 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1470 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1471 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1472
1473 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1474 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1475 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1476
1477 @cindex emulation
1478 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1479 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1480 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1481 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1482 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1483
1484 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1485 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1486 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1487 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1488 preferred options instead.
1489
1490 @item -nocpp
1491 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1492 the native tools.
1493
1494 @item --trap
1495 @itemx --no-trap
1496 @itemx --break
1497 @itemx --no-break
1498 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1499 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1500 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1501 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1502 break exception.
1503
1504 @item -n
1505 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1506 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1507 @end table
1508 @end ifset
1509
1510 @ifset MCORE
1511 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1512 an MCore processor.
1513
1514 @table @gcctabopt
1515 @item -jsri2bsr
1516 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1517 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1518 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1519
1520 @item -sifilter
1521 @itemx -nosifilter
1522 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1523 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1524
1525 @item -relax
1526 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1527
1528 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1529 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1530 can be assembled.
1531
1532 @item -EB
1533 Assemble for a big endian target.
1534
1535 @item -EL
1536 Assemble for a little endian target.
1537
1538 @end table
1539 @end ifset
1540 @c man end
1541
1542 @ifset METAG
1543
1544 @ifclear man
1545 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1546 for a Meta processor.
1547 @end ifclear
1548
1549 @ifset man
1550 @c man begin OPTIONS
1551 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1552 Meta processor.
1553 @c man end
1554 @c man begin INCLUDE
1555 @include c-metag.texi
1556 @c ended inside the included file
1557 @end ifset
1558
1559 @end ifset
1560
1561 @c man begin OPTIONS
1562 @ifset MMIX
1563 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1564 @end ifset
1565
1566 @ifset NDS32
1567
1568 @ifclear man
1569 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1570 for a NDS32 processor.
1571 @end ifclear
1572 @c ended inside the included file
1573 @end ifset
1574
1575 @ifset man
1576 @c man begin OPTIONS
1577 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1578 NDS32 processor.
1579 @c man end
1580 @c man begin INCLUDE
1581 @include c-nds32.texi
1582 @c ended inside the included file
1583 @end ifset
1584
1585 @c man end
1586 @ifset PPC
1587
1588 @ifclear man
1589 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1590 for a PowerPC processor.
1591 @end ifclear
1592
1593 @ifset man
1594 @c man begin OPTIONS
1595 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1596 PowerPC processor.
1597 @c man end
1598 @c man begin INCLUDE
1599 @include c-ppc.texi
1600 @c ended inside the included file
1601 @end ifset
1602
1603 @end ifset
1604
1605 @c man begin OPTIONS
1606 @ifset RX
1607 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1608 @end ifset
1609
1610 @ifset S390
1611 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1612 processor family.
1613
1614 @table @gcctabopt
1615 @item -m31
1616 @itemx -m64
1617 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1618 @item -mesa
1619 @item -mzarch
1620 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1621 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1622 @item -march=@var{processor}
1623 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1624 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1625 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
1626 @item -mregnames
1627 @itemx -mno-regnames
1628 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1629 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1630 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1631 but evaluates to zero.
1632 @end table
1633 @end ifset
1634 @c man end
1635
1636 @ifset TIC6X
1637
1638 @ifclear man
1639 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1640 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1641 @end ifclear
1642
1643 @ifset man
1644 @c man begin OPTIONS
1645 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1646 TMS320C6000 processor.
1647 @c man end
1648 @c man begin INCLUDE
1649 @include c-tic6x.texi
1650 @c ended inside the included file
1651 @end ifset
1652
1653 @end ifset
1654
1655 @ifset TILEGX
1656
1657 @ifclear man
1658 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1659 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1660 @end ifclear
1661
1662 @ifset man
1663 @c man begin OPTIONS
1664 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1665 processor.
1666 @c man end
1667 @c man begin INCLUDE
1668 @include c-tilegx.texi
1669 @c ended inside the included file
1670 @end ifset
1671
1672 @end ifset
1673
1674 @ifset VISIUM
1675
1676 @ifclear man
1677 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1678 for a Visium processor.
1679 @end ifclear
1680
1681 @ifset man
1682 @c man begin OPTIONS
1683 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1684 processor.
1685 @c man end
1686 @c man begin INCLUDE
1687 @include c-visium.texi
1688 @c ended inside the included file
1689 @end ifset
1690
1691 @end ifset
1692
1693 @ifset XTENSA
1694
1695 @ifclear man
1696 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1697 for an Xtensa processor.
1698 @end ifclear
1699
1700 @ifset man
1701 @c man begin OPTIONS
1702 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1703 Xtensa processor.
1704 @c man end
1705 @c man begin INCLUDE
1706 @include c-xtensa.texi
1707 @c ended inside the included file
1708 @end ifset
1709
1710 @end ifset
1711
1712 @c man begin OPTIONS
1713
1714 @ifset Z80
1715 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1716 a Z80 family processor.
1717 @table @gcctabopt
1718 @item -z80
1719 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1720 @item -r800
1721 Assemble for R800 processor.
1722 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1723 @itemx -Wnud
1724 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1725 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1726 @itemx -Wnup
1727 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1728 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1729 @itemx -Wud
1730 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1731 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1732 @itemx -Wup
1733 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1734 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1735 @itemx -Fud
1736 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1737 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1738 @itemx -Fup
1739 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1740 @end table
1741 @end ifset
1742
1743 @c man end
1744
1745 @menu
1746 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1747 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1748 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1749 * Command Line:: Command Line
1750 * Input Files:: Input Files
1751 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1752 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1753 @end menu
1754
1755 @node Manual
1756 @section Structure of this Manual
1757
1758 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1759 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1760 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1761 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1762 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1763
1764 @ifclear GENERIC
1765 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1766 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1767 @end ifclear
1768 @ifset GENERIC
1769 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1770 various flavors of the assembler.
1771 @end ifset
1772
1773 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1774 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1775 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1776 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1777 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1778 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1779 particular architecture.
1780 @ifset GENERIC
1781 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1782 machine architecture manual for this information.
1783 @end ifset
1784 @ifclear GENERIC
1785 @ifset H8/300
1786 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1787 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1788 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1789 @end ifset
1790 @ifset SH
1791 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1792 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1793 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1794 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1795 @end ifset
1796 @ifset Z8000
1797 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1798 @end ifset
1799 @end ifclear
1800
1801 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1802 @ignore
1803 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1804 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1805 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1806 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1807 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1808 qualification.
1809
1810 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1811 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1812 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1813 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1814 @end ignore
1815
1816 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1817 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1818 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1819 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1820 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1821 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1822 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1823 @c directives).
1824
1825 @node GNU Assembler
1826 @section The GNU Assembler
1827
1828 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1829
1830 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1831 @ifclear GENERIC
1832 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1833 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1834 @end ifclear
1835 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1836 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1837 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1838 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1839 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1840
1841 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1842 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1843 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1844 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1845 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1846 machine would assemble.
1847 @ifset VAX
1848 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1849 @end ifset
1850 @ifset M680X0
1851 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1852 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1853 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1854 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1855 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1856 @end ifset
1857
1858 @c man end
1859
1860 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1861 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1862 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1863
1864 @node Object Formats
1865 @section Object File Formats
1866
1867 @cindex object file format
1868 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1869 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1870 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1871 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1872 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1873 @ifclear GENERIC
1874 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1875 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1876 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1877 @end ifclear
1878 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1879 @ifset I960
1880 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1881 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1882 @end ifset
1883 @ifset HPPA
1884 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1885 SOM or ELF format object files.
1886 @end ifset
1887 @end ifclear
1888
1889 @node Command Line
1890 @section Command Line
1891
1892 @cindex command line conventions
1893
1894 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1895 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1896 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1897 significant.
1898
1899 @cindex standard input, as input file
1900 @kindex --
1901 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1902 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1903
1904 @cindex options, command line
1905 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1906 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1907 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1908 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1909 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1910
1911 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1912 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1913 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1914 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1915
1916 @smallexample
1917 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1918 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1919 @end smallexample
1920
1921 @node Input Files
1922 @section Input Files
1923
1924 @cindex input
1925 @cindex source program
1926 @cindex files, input
1927 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1928 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1929 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1930 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1931
1932 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1933 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1934 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1935 order specified.
1936
1937 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1938 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1939 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1940 (The standard input is also a file.)
1941
1942 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1943 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1944 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1945 is taken to be an input file name.
1946
1947 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1948 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1949 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1950 to assemble.
1951
1952 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1953 in your command line.
1954
1955 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1956 file.
1957
1958 @c man end
1959
1960 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1961
1962 @cindex input file linenumbers
1963 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1964 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1965 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1966 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1967 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1968
1969 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1970 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1971
1972 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1973 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1974 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1975 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1976 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1977 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1978
1979 @node Object
1980 @section Output (Object) File
1981
1982 @cindex object file
1983 @cindex output file
1984 @kindex a.out
1985 @kindex .o
1986 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1987 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1988 is the object file. Its default name is
1989 @ifclear BOUT
1990 @code{a.out}.
1991 @end ifclear
1992 @ifset BOUT
1993 @ifset GENERIC
1994 @code{a.out}, or
1995 @end ifset
1996 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1997 @end ifset
1998 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1999 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2000 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2001 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2002 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2003
2004 @cindex linker
2005 @kindex ld
2006 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2007 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2008 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2009 information for the debugger.
2010
2011 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2012 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2013
2014 @node Errors
2015 @section Error and Warning Messages
2016
2017 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2018
2019 @cindex error messages
2020 @cindex warning messages
2021 @cindex messages from assembler
2022 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2023 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2024 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2025 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2026 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2027
2028 @c man end
2029
2030 @cindex format of warning messages
2031 Warning messages have the format
2032
2033 @smallexample
2034 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2035 @end smallexample
2036
2037 @noindent
2038 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
2039 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
2040 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
2041 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
2042 @ifset GENERIC
2043 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2044 @end ifset
2045 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
2046 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
2047 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
2048 tradition).
2049
2050 @cindex format of error messages
2051 Error messages have the format
2052 @smallexample
2053 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2054 @end smallexample
2055 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2056 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2057 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2058
2059 @node Invoking
2060 @chapter Command-Line Options
2061
2062 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2063 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2064 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2065 for options specific
2066 @ifclear GENERIC
2067 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2068 @end ifclear
2069 @ifset GENERIC
2070 to particular machine architectures.
2071 @end ifset
2072
2073 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2074
2075 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2076 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2077 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2078 by commas. For example:
2079
2080 @smallexample
2081 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2082 @end smallexample
2083
2084 @noindent
2085 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2086 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2087 local symbols in the symbol table).
2088
2089 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2090 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2091 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2092 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2093 assembler.)
2094
2095 @c man end
2096
2097 @menu
2098 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2099 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2100 * D:: -D for compatibility
2101 * f:: -f to work faster
2102 * I:: -I for .include search path
2103 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2104 * K:: -K for compatibility
2105 @end ifclear
2106 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2107 * K:: -K for difference tables
2108 @end ifset
2109
2110 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2111 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2112 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2113 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2114 * o:: -o to name the object file
2115 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2116 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2117 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2118 * v:: -v to announce version
2119 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2120 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2121 @end menu
2122
2123 @node a
2124 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2125
2126 @kindex -a
2127 @kindex -ac
2128 @kindex -ad
2129 @kindex -ag
2130 @kindex -ah
2131 @kindex -al
2132 @kindex -an
2133 @kindex -as
2134 @cindex listings, enabling
2135 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2136
2137 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2138 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2139 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2140 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2141 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2142 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2143 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2144 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2145 also.
2146
2147 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2148 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2149
2150 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2151 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2152 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2153 omitted from the listing.
2154
2155 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2156 listing.
2157
2158 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2159 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2160 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2161 @code{.sbttl}.
2162 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2163 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2164 listing-control directives have no effect.
2165
2166 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2167 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2168
2169 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2170 because it
2171 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2172 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2173 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2174 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2175 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2176
2177 @node alternate
2178 @section @option{--alternate}
2179
2180 @kindex --alternate
2181 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2182
2183 @node D
2184 @section @option{-D}
2185
2186 @kindex -D
2187 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2188 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2189 @command{@value{AS}}.
2190
2191 @node f
2192 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2193
2194 @kindex -f
2195 @cindex trusted compiler
2196 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2197 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2198 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2199 and comment preprocessing on
2200 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2201 ,Preprocessing}.
2202
2203 @quotation
2204 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2205 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2206 not work correctly.
2207 @end quotation
2208
2209 @node I
2210 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2211
2212 @kindex -I @var{path}
2213 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2214 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2215 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2216 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2217 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2218 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2219 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2220 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2221 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2222 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2223
2224 @node K
2225 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2226
2227 @kindex -K
2228 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2229 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2230 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2231 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2232 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2233 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2234 alteration on other platforms.
2235 @end ifclear
2236
2237 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2238 @cindex difference tables, warning
2239 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2240 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2241 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2242 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2243 is done.
2244 @end ifset
2245
2246 @node L
2247 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2248
2249 @kindex -L
2250 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2251 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2252 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2253 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2254 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2255 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2256 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2257 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2258
2259 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2260 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2261 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2262
2263 @node listing
2264 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2265
2266 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2267 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2268 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2269 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2270 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2271 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2272 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2273 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2274
2275 @table @gcctabopt
2276 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2277 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2278 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2279 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2280 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2281
2282 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2283 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2284 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2285 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2286 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2287 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2288 switch is used the default is to one.
2289
2290 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2291 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2292 @cindex Width of source line output
2293 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2294 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2295 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2296
2297 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2298 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2299 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2300 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2301 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2302 @end table
2303
2304 @node M
2305 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2306
2307 @kindex -M
2308 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2309 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2310 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2311 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2312 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2313 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2314 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2315 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2316 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2317
2318 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2319 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2320 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2321 individually. These are:
2322
2323 @itemize @bullet
2324 @item global symbols in common section
2325
2326 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2327 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2328 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2329 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2330 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2331
2332 @item complex relocations
2333
2334 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2335 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2336 are not support by other object file formats.
2337
2338 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2339
2340 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2341 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2342 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2343 script.
2344
2345 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2346
2347 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2348 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2349
2350 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2351
2352 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2353 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2354 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2355 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2356 assigned within a linker script.
2357 @end itemize
2358
2359 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2360 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2361 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2362
2363 @itemize @bullet
2364
2365 @item EBCDIC strings
2366
2367 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2368
2369 @item packed binary coded decimal
2370
2371 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2372 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2373
2374 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2375
2376 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2377
2378 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2379
2380 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2381
2382 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2383
2384 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2385 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2386 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2387 these options serve no purpose.
2388
2389 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2390
2391 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2392 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2393 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2394
2395 @item other @code{OPT} options
2396
2397 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2398 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2399
2400 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2401
2402 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2403 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2404
2405 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2406
2407 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2408
2409 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2410
2411 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2412
2413 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2414
2415 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2416
2417 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2418
2419 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2420
2421 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2422
2423 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2424
2425 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2426
2427 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2428
2429 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2430
2431 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2432
2433 @end itemize
2434
2435 @node MD
2436 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2437
2438 @kindex --MD
2439 @cindex dependency tracking
2440 @cindex make rules
2441
2442 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2443 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2444 dependencies of the main source file.
2445
2446 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2447
2448 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2449
2450 @node o
2451 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2452
2453 @kindex -o
2454 @cindex naming object file
2455 @cindex object file name
2456 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2457 default it has the name
2458 @ifset GENERIC
2459 @ifset I960
2460 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2461 @end ifset
2462 @ifclear I960
2463 @file{a.out}.
2464 @end ifclear
2465 @end ifset
2466 @ifclear GENERIC
2467 @ifset I960
2468 @file{b.out}.
2469 @end ifset
2470 @ifclear I960
2471 @file{a.out}.
2472 @end ifclear
2473 @end ifclear
2474 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2475 object file a different name.
2476
2477 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2478 existing file of the same name.
2479
2480 @node R
2481 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2482
2483 @kindex -R
2484 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2485 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2486 @cindex joining text and data sections
2487 @cindex merging text and data sections
2488 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2489 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2490 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2491 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2492 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2493 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2494
2495 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2496 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2497 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2498 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2499
2500 @ifset COFF-ELF
2501 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2502 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2503 @samp{.data}.
2504 @end ifset
2505
2506 @ifset HPPA
2507 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2508 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2509 @end ifset
2510
2511 @node statistics
2512 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2513
2514 @kindex --statistics
2515 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2516 @cindex time, total for assembly
2517 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2518 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2519 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2520 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2521 seconds).
2522
2523 @node traditional-format
2524 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2525
2526 @kindex --traditional-format
2527 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2528 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2529 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2530
2531 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2532 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2533
2534 @node v
2535 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2536
2537 @kindex -v
2538 @kindex -version
2539 @cindex assembler version
2540 @cindex version of assembler
2541 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2542 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2543 command line.
2544
2545 @node W
2546 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2547
2548 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2549 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2550 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2551 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2552
2553 @kindex -W
2554 @kindex --no-warn
2555 @cindex suppressing warnings
2556 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2557 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2558 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2559 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2560 are still reported.
2561
2562 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2563 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2564 @cindex warnings, causing error
2565 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2566 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2567
2568 @kindex --warn
2569 @cindex warnings, switching on
2570 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2571 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2572
2573 @node Z
2574 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2575 @cindex object file, after errors
2576 @cindex errors, continuing after
2577 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2578 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2579 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2580 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2581 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2582 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2583
2584 @node Syntax
2585 @chapter Syntax
2586
2587 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2588 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2589 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2590 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2591 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2592 @ifclear VAX
2593 assembler.
2594 @end ifclear
2595 @ifset VAX
2596 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2597 @end ifset
2598
2599 @menu
2600 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2601 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2602 * Comments:: Comments
2603 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2604 * Statements:: Statements
2605 * Constants:: Constants
2606 @end menu
2607
2608 @node Preprocessing
2609 @section Preprocessing
2610
2611 @cindex preprocessing
2612 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2613 @itemize @bullet
2614 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2615 @item
2616 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2617 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2618 a single space.
2619
2620 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2621 @item
2622 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2623 appropriate number of newlines.
2624
2625 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2626 @item
2627 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2628 @end itemize
2629
2630 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2631 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2632 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2633 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2634 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2635 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2636 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2637
2638 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2639 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2640 preprocessed.
2641
2642 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2643 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2644 @kindex #NO_APP
2645 @kindex #APP
2646 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2647 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2648 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2649 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2650 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2651 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2652 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2653 and whitespace.
2654
2655 @node Whitespace
2656 @section Whitespace
2657
2658 @cindex whitespace
2659 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2660 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2661 people to read. Unless within character constants
2662 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2663 as exactly one space.
2664
2665 @node Comments
2666 @section Comments
2667
2668 @cindex comments
2669 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2670 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2671
2672 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2673 This means you may not nest these comments.
2674
2675 @smallexample
2676 /*
2677 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2678 is to use this sort of comment.
2679 */
2680
2681 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2682 @end smallexample
2683
2684 @cindex line comment character
2685 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2686 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2687 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2688 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2689 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2690 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2691 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2692 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2693
2694 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2695 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2696 to specify logical line numbers:
2697
2698 @kindex #
2699 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2700 @cindex logical line numbers
2701 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2702 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2703 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2704 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2705 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2706
2707 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2708 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2709
2710 @smallexample
2711 # This is an ordinary comment.
2712 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2713 # This is logical line # 36.
2714 @end smallexample
2715 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2716 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2717
2718 @node Symbol Intro
2719 @section Symbols
2720
2721 @cindex characters used in symbols
2722 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2723 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2724 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2725 @samp{_.$}.
2726 @end ifclear
2727 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2728 @ifclear GENERIC
2729 @ifset H8
2730 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2731 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2732 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2733 symbol names.)
2734 @end ifset
2735 @end ifclear
2736 @end ifset
2737 @ifset GENERIC
2738 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2739 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2740 @end ifset
2741 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2742 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2743 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2744 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2745 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2746 @cindex length of symbols
2747
2748 @node Statements
2749 @section Statements
2750
2751 @cindex statements, structure of
2752 @cindex line separator character
2753 @cindex statement separator character
2754
2755 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2756 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2757 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2758 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2759 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2760 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2761 exception: they do not end statements.
2762
2763 @cindex newline, required at file end
2764 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2765 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2766 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2767
2768 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2769
2770 @cindex instructions and directives
2771 @cindex directives and instructions
2772 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2773 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2774 @c 13feb91.
2775 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2776 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2777 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2778 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2779 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2780 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2781 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2782 @ifset GENERIC
2783 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2784 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2785 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2786 language.@refill
2787 @end ifset
2788
2789 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2790 @cindex label (@code{:})
2791 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2792 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2793 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2794
2795 @ifset HPPA
2796 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2797 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2798 only one label may be defined on each line.
2799 @end ifset
2800
2801 @smallexample
2802 label: .directive followed by something
2803 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2804 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2805 @end smallexample
2806
2807 @node Constants
2808 @section Constants
2809
2810 @cindex constants
2811 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2812 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2813 @smallexample
2814 @group
2815 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2816 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2817 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2818 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2819 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2820 @end group
2821 @end smallexample
2822
2823 @menu
2824 * Characters:: Character Constants
2825 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2826 @end menu
2827
2828 @node Characters
2829 @subsection Character Constants
2830
2831 @cindex character constants
2832 @cindex constants, character
2833 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2834 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2835 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2836 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2837 used in arithmetic expressions.
2838
2839 @menu
2840 * Strings:: Strings
2841 * Chars:: Characters
2842 @end menu
2843
2844 @node Strings
2845 @subsubsection Strings
2846
2847 @cindex string constants
2848 @cindex constants, string
2849 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2850 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2851 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2852 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2853 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2854 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2855 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2856 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2857
2858 @cindex escape codes, character
2859 @cindex character escape codes
2860 @table @kbd
2861 @c @item \a
2862 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2863 @c
2864 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2865 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2866 @item \b
2867 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2868
2869 @c @item \e
2870 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2871 @c
2872 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2873 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2874 @item \f
2875 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2876
2877 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2878 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2879 @item \n
2880 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2881
2882 @c @item \p
2883 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2884 @c
2885 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2886 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2887 @item \r
2888 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2889
2890 @c @item \s
2891 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2892 @c other assemblers.
2893 @c
2894 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2895 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2896 @item \t
2897 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2898
2899 @c @item \v
2900 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2901 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2902 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2903 @c
2904 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2905 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2906 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2907 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2908 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2909 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2910
2911 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2912 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2913 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2914 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2915 lower case @code{x} works.
2916
2917 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2918 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2919 @item \\
2920 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2921
2922 @c @item \'
2923 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2924 @c This is needed in single character literals
2925 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2926 @c a @samp{'}.
2927 @c
2928 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2929 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2930 @item \"
2931 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2932 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2933
2934 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2935 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2936 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2937 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2938 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2939 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2940 code and warns you of the fact.
2941 @end table
2942
2943 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2944 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2945 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2946 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2947 sequence.
2948
2949 @node Chars
2950 @subsubsection Characters
2951
2952 @cindex single character constant
2953 @cindex character, single
2954 @cindex constant, single character
2955 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2956 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2957 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2958 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2959 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2960 grave accent. A newline
2961 @ifclear GENERIC
2962 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2963 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2964 @end ifclear
2965 @ifset abnormal-separator
2966 @ifset H8
2967 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2968 Renesas SH)
2969 @end ifset
2970 @end ifset
2971 @end ifclear
2972 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2973 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2974 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2975 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2976 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2977
2978 @node Numbers
2979 @subsection Number Constants
2980
2981 @cindex constants, number
2982 @cindex number constants
2983 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2984 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2985 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2986 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2987 are floating point numbers, described below.
2988
2989 @menu
2990 * Integers:: Integers
2991 * Bignums:: Bignums
2992 * Flonums:: Flonums
2993 @ifclear GENERIC
2994 @ifset I960
2995 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2996 @end ifset
2997 @end ifclear
2998 @end menu
2999
3000 @node Integers
3001 @subsubsection Integers
3002 @cindex integers
3003 @cindex constants, integer
3004
3005 @cindex binary integers
3006 @cindex integers, binary
3007 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3008 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3009
3010 @cindex octal integers
3011 @cindex integers, octal
3012 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3013 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3014
3015 @cindex decimal integers
3016 @cindex integers, decimal
3017 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3018 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3019
3020 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3021 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3022 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3023 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3024
3025 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3026 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3027 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3028
3029 @node Bignums
3030 @subsubsection Bignums
3031
3032 @cindex bignums
3033 @cindex constants, bignum
3034 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3035 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3036 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3037 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3038
3039 @node Flonums
3040 @subsubsection Flonums
3041 @cindex flonums
3042 @cindex floating point numbers
3043 @cindex constants, floating point
3044
3045 @cindex precision, floating point
3046 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3047 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3048 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3049 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3050 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3051 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3052
3053 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3054 @itemize @bullet
3055 @item
3056 The digit @samp{0}.
3057 @ifset HPPA
3058 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3059 @end ifset
3060
3061 @item
3062 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3063 @ifset GENERIC
3064 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3065 @ignore
3066 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3067 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3068 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3069 @end ignore
3070
3071 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3072 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3073 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3074
3075 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3076 (in upper or lower case).
3077
3078 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3079 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3080
3081 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3082 @end ifset
3083 @ifclear GENERIC
3084 @ifset ARC
3085 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3086 @end ifset
3087 @ifset H8
3088 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3089 @end ifset
3090 @ifset HPPA
3091 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3092 @end ifset
3093 @ifset I960
3094 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3095 @end ifset
3096 @end ifclear
3097
3098 @item
3099 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3100
3101 @item
3102 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3103
3104 @item
3105 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3106 or more decimal digits.
3107
3108 @item
3109 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3110
3111 @itemize @bullet
3112 @item
3113 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3114 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3115 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3116 @item
3117 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3118 @item
3119 One or more decimal digits.
3120 @end itemize
3121
3122 @end itemize
3123
3124 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3125 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3126
3127 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3128 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3129 @command{@value{AS}}.
3130
3131 @ifclear GENERIC
3132 @ifset I960
3133 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3134 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3135 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3136 @node Bit Fields
3137 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3138
3139 @cindex bit fields
3140 @cindex constants, bit field
3141 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3142 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3143 @example
3144 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3145 @end example
3146 @noindent
3147 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3148 @var{value}.
3149
3150 The resulting number is then packed
3151 @ifset GENERIC
3152 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3153 (in host-dependent byte order)
3154 @end ifset
3155 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3156 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3157 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3158 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3159 least significant digits.@refill
3160
3161 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3162 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3163 @end ifset
3164 @end ifclear
3165
3166 @node Sections
3167 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3168 @cindex sections
3169 @cindex relocation
3170
3171 @menu
3172 * Secs Background:: Background
3173 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3174 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3175 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3176 * bss:: bss Section
3177 @end menu
3178
3179 @node Secs Background
3180 @section Background
3181
3182 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3183 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3184 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3185
3186 @cindex linker, and assembler
3187 @cindex assembler, and linker
3188 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3189 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3190 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3191 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3192 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3193 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3194 sections.
3195
3196 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3197 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3198 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3199 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3200 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3201 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3202 the proper run-time addresses.
3203 @ifset H8
3204 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3205 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3206 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3207 @end ifset
3208
3209 @cindex standard assembler sections
3210 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3211 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3212 @dfn{bss} sections.
3213
3214 @ifset COFF-ELF
3215 @ifset GENERIC
3216 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3217 @end ifset
3218 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3219 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3220 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3221 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3222 @end ifset
3223
3224 @ifset HPPA
3225 @ifset GENERIC
3226 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3227 @end ifset
3228 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3229 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3230 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3231 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3232 assembler directives.
3233
3234 @ifset SOM
3235 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3236 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3237 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3238 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3239 @end ifset
3240 @end ifset
3241
3242 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3243 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3244
3245 @ifset HPPA
3246 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3247 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3248 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3249 @end ifset
3250
3251 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3252 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3253 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3254 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3255 file is mentioned:
3256 @itemize @bullet
3257 @item
3258 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3259 an address?
3260 @item
3261 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3262 @item
3263 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3264 @display
3265 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3266 @end display
3267 @item
3268 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3269 @end itemize
3270
3271 @cindex addresses, format of
3272 @cindex section-relative addressing
3273 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3274 @display
3275 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3276 @end display
3277 @noindent
3278 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3279 nature.
3280 @ifset SOM
3281 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3282 symbol-relative instead.)
3283 @end ifset
3284
3285 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3286 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3287
3288 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3289 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3290 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3291 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3292 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3293 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3294 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3295 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3296 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3297
3298 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3299 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3300 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3301 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3302 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3303 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3304 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3305
3306 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3307 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3308 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3309 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3310 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3311 data and bss sections.
3312
3313 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3314 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3315
3316 @node Ld Sections
3317 @section Linker Sections
3318 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3319
3320 @table @strong
3321
3322 @ifset COFF-ELF
3323 @cindex named sections
3324 @cindex sections, named
3325 @item named sections
3326 @end ifset
3327 @ifset aout-bout
3328 @cindex text section
3329 @cindex data section
3330 @itemx text section
3331 @itemx data section
3332 @end ifset
3333 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3334 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3335 true of another.
3336 @c @ifset aout-bout
3337 When the program is running, however, it is
3338 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3339 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3340 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3341 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3342 in the data section.
3343 @c @end ifset
3344
3345 @cindex bss section
3346 @item bss section
3347 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3348 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3349 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3350 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3351 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3352 those explicit zeros from object files.
3353
3354 @cindex absolute section
3355 @item absolute section
3356 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3357 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3358 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3359 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3360
3361 @cindex undefined section
3362 @item undefined section
3363 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3364 the preceding sections.
3365 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3366 @end table
3367
3368 @cindex relocation example
3369 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3370 @ifset COFF-ELF
3371 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3372 @end ifset
3373 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3374
3375 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3376 @ifnottex
3377 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3378 @smallexample
3379 +-----+----+--+
3380 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3381 +-----+----+--+
3382
3383 text data bss
3384 seg. seg. seg.
3385
3386 +---+---+---+
3387 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3388 +---+---+---+
3389
3390 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3391 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3392 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3393
3394 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3395 @end smallexample
3396 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3397 @end ifnottex
3398 @need 5000
3399 @tex
3400 \bigskip
3401 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3402 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3403 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3404
3405 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3406 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3407 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3408
3409 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3410 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3411 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3412 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3413 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3414
3415 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3416 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3417
3418 @end tex
3419 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3420
3421 @node As Sections
3422 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3423
3424 @cindex internal assembler sections
3425 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3426 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3427 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3428 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3429 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3430 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3431 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3432 section-relative address.
3433
3434 @table @b
3435 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3436 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3437 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3438 bug in the assembler.
3439
3440 @cindex expr (internal section)
3441 @item expr section
3442 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3443 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3444 it in the expr section.
3445 @c FIXME item debug
3446 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3447 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3448 @c FIXME item register
3449 @end table
3450
3451 @node Sub-Sections
3452 @section Sub-Sections
3453
3454 @cindex numbered subsections
3455 @cindex grouping data
3456 @ifset aout-bout
3457 Assembled bytes
3458 @ifset COFF-ELF
3459 conventionally
3460 @end ifset
3461 fall into two sections: text and data.
3462 @end ifset
3463 You may have separate groups of
3464 @ifset GENERIC
3465 data in named sections
3466 @end ifset
3467 @ifclear GENERIC
3468 @ifclear aout-bout
3469 data in named sections
3470 @end ifclear
3471 @ifset aout-bout
3472 text or data
3473 @end ifset
3474 @end ifclear
3475 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3476 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3477 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3478 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3479 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3480 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3481 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3482 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3483 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3484 constants being output.
3485
3486 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3487 goes in subsection number zero.
3488
3489 @ifset GENERIC
3490 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3491 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3492 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3493 @end ifset
3494 @ifclear GENERIC
3495 @ifset H8
3496 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3497 boundary (two bytes).
3498 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3499 @end ifset
3500 @ifset I960
3501 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3502 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3503 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3504 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3505 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3506 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3507 @end ifset
3508 @end ifclear
3509
3510 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3511 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3512 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3513 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3514 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3515 data subsections as a data section.
3516
3517 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3518 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3519 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3520 @ifset COFF
3521 @ifset GENERIC
3522 When generating COFF output, you
3523 @end ifset
3524 @ifclear GENERIC
3525 You
3526 @end ifclear
3527 can also use an extra subsection
3528 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3529 @var{expression}}.
3530 @end ifset
3531 @ifset ELF
3532 @ifset GENERIC
3533 When generating ELF output, you
3534 @end ifset
3535 @ifclear GENERIC
3536 You
3537 @end ifclear
3538 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3539 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3540 @end ifset
3541 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3542 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3543 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3544 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3545 @smallexample
3546 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3547 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3548 .text 1
3549 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3550 .data 0
3551 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3552 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3553 .text 0
3554 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3555 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3556 @end smallexample
3557
3558 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3559 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3560 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3561 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3562 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3563 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3564 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3565
3566 @node bss
3567 @section bss Section
3568
3569 @cindex bss section
3570 @cindex common variable storage
3571 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3572 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3573 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3574 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3575 section are zeroed bytes.
3576
3577 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3578 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3579
3580 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3581 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3582
3583 @ifset GENERIC
3584 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3585 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3586 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3587 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3588 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3589 @end ifset
3590
3591 @node Symbols
3592 @chapter Symbols
3593
3594 @cindex symbols
3595 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3596 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3597 to debug.
3598
3599 @quotation
3600 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3601 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3602 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3603 @end quotation
3604
3605 @menu
3606 * Labels:: Labels
3607 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3608 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3609 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3610 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3611 @end menu
3612
3613 @node Labels
3614 @section Labels
3615
3616 @cindex labels
3617 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3618 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3619 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3620 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3621 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3622 definitions.
3623
3624 @ifset HPPA
3625 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3626 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3627 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3628 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3629 @end ifset
3630
3631 @node Setting Symbols
3632 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3633
3634 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3635 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3636 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3637 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3638 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3639 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3640 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3641 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3642
3643 @ifset Blackfin
3644 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3645 @end ifset
3646
3647 @node Symbol Names
3648 @section Symbol Names
3649
3650 @cindex symbol names
3651 @cindex names, symbol
3652 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3653 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3654 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3655 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3656 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3657 particular target machine), and underscores.
3658 @end ifclear
3659 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3660 @ifset H8
3661 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3662 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3663 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3664 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3665 @end ifset
3666 @end ifset
3667
3668 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3669 than @code{Foo}.
3670
3671 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3672 Local Labels. See below.
3673
3674 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3675 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3676 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3677 currently supported.
3678
3679 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3680 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3681 in a program.
3682
3683 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3684
3685 @cindex local symbol names
3686 @cindex symbol names, local
3687 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3688 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3689 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3690 set of local label prefixes.
3691 @ifset HPPA
3692 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3693 @end ifset
3694
3695 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3696 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3697 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3698 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3699
3700 @subheading Local Labels
3701
3702 @cindex local labels
3703 @cindex temporary symbol names
3704 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3705 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3706 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3707 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3708 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3709 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any positive integer). To refer
3710 to the most recent previous definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using
3711 the same number as when you defined the label. To refer to the next definition
3712 of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards''
3713 and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3714
3715 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3716 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3717 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3718 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3719 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3720 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3721 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3722
3723 Here is an example:
3724
3725 @smallexample
3726 1: branch 1f
3727 2: branch 1b
3728 1: branch 2f
3729 2: branch 1b
3730 @end smallexample
3731
3732 Which is the equivalent of:
3733
3734 @smallexample
3735 label_1: branch label_3
3736 label_2: branch label_1
3737 label_3: branch label_4
3738 label_4: branch label_3
3739 @end smallexample
3740
3741 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3742 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3743 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3744 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3745 these parts:
3746
3747 @table @code
3748 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3749 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3750 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3751 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3752 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3753 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3754 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3755 you may use them in debugging.
3756
3757 @item @var{number}
3758 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3759 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3760
3761 @item @kbd{C-B}
3762 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3763 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3764
3765 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3766 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3767 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3768 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3769 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3770 @end table
3771
3772 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3773 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3774
3775 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3776 @cindex dollar local symbols
3777
3778 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3779 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3780 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3781 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3782 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3783 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3784
3785 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3786 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3787 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3788
3789 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3790 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3791 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3792 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3793
3794 @node Dot
3795 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3796
3797 @cindex dot (symbol)
3798 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3799 @cindex current address
3800 @cindex location counter
3801 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3802 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3803 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3804 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3805 directive.
3806 @ifclear no-space-dir
3807 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3808 @samp{.space 4}.
3809 @end ifclear
3810
3811 @node Symbol Attributes
3812 @section Symbol Attributes
3813
3814 @cindex symbol attributes
3815 @cindex attributes, symbol
3816 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3817 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3818 attributes.
3819 @ifset INTERNALS
3820 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3821 @end ifset
3822
3823 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3824 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3825 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3826 would want.
3827
3828 @menu
3829 * Symbol Value:: Value
3830 * Symbol Type:: Type
3831 @ifset aout-bout
3832 @ifset GENERIC
3833 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3834 @end ifset
3835 @ifclear GENERIC
3836 @ifclear BOUT
3837 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3838 @end ifclear
3839 @ifset BOUT
3840 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3841 @end ifset
3842 @end ifclear
3843 @end ifset
3844 @ifset COFF
3845 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3846 @end ifset
3847 @ifset SOM
3848 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3849 @end ifset
3850 @end menu
3851
3852 @node Symbol Value
3853 @subsection Value
3854
3855 @cindex value of a symbol
3856 @cindex symbol value
3857 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3858 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3859 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3860 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3861 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3862 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3863 called absolute.
3864
3865 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3866 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3867 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3868 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3869 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3870 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3871 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3872 allocated storage.
3873
3874 @node Symbol Type
3875 @subsection Type
3876
3877 @cindex type of a symbol
3878 @cindex symbol type
3879 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3880 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3881 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3882 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3883
3884 @ifset aout-bout
3885 @ifclear GENERIC
3886 @ifset BOUT
3887 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3888 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3889 @need 1000
3890 @node a.out Symbols
3891 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3892
3893 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3894 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3895 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3896 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3897 @code{b.out}.
3898
3899 @end ifset
3900 @ifclear BOUT
3901 @node a.out Symbols
3902 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3903
3904 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3905 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3906
3907 @end ifclear
3908 @end ifclear
3909 @ifset GENERIC
3910 @node a.out Symbols
3911 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3912
3913 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3914 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3915
3916 @end ifset
3917 @menu
3918 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3919 * Symbol Other:: Other
3920 @end menu
3921
3922 @node Symbol Desc
3923 @subsubsection Descriptor
3924
3925 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3926 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3927 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3928 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3929 @command{@value{AS}}.
3930
3931 @node Symbol Other
3932 @subsubsection Other
3933
3934 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3935 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3936 @end ifset
3937
3938 @ifset COFF
3939 @node COFF Symbols
3940 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3941
3942 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3943 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3944
3945 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3946 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3947 @code{.endef} directives.
3948
3949 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3950
3951 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3952 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3953 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3954
3955 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3956
3957 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3958 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3959 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3960 table information for COFF.
3961 @end ifset
3962
3963 @ifset SOM
3964 @node SOM Symbols
3965 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3966
3967 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3968 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3969
3970 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3971 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3972
3973 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3974 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3975 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3976 @end ifset
3977
3978 @node Expressions
3979 @chapter Expressions
3980
3981 @cindex expressions
3982 @cindex addresses
3983 @cindex numeric values
3984 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3985 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3986
3987 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3988 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3989 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3990 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3991 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3992 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3993
3994 @menu
3995 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3996 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3997 @end menu
3998
3999 @node Empty Exprs
4000 @section Empty Expressions
4001
4002 @cindex empty expressions
4003 @cindex expressions, empty
4004 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4005 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4006 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4007 is compatible with other assemblers.
4008
4009 @node Integer Exprs
4010 @section Integer Expressions
4011
4012 @cindex integer expressions
4013 @cindex expressions, integer
4014 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4015 by @emph{operators}.
4016
4017 @menu
4018 * Arguments:: Arguments
4019 * Operators:: Operators
4020 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4021 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4022 @end menu
4023
4024 @node Arguments
4025 @subsection Arguments
4026
4027 @cindex expression arguments
4028 @cindex arguments in expressions
4029 @cindex operands in expressions
4030 @cindex arithmetic operands
4031 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4032 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4033 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4034 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4035 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4036 instruction operands.
4037
4038 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4039 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4040 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4041 integer.
4042
4043 Numbers are usually integers.
4044
4045 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4046 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4047 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4048 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4049 assemblers.
4050
4051 @cindex subexpressions
4052 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4053 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4054 operator followed by an argument.
4055
4056 @node Operators
4057 @subsection Operators
4058
4059 @cindex operators, in expressions
4060 @cindex arithmetic functions
4061 @cindex functions, in expressions
4062 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4063 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4064 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4065 whitespace.
4066
4067 @node Prefix Ops
4068 @subsection Prefix Operator
4069
4070 @cindex prefix operators
4071 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4072 one argument, which must be absolute.
4073
4074 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4075 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4076 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4077 @tex
4078 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4079 @end tex
4080
4081 @table @code
4082 @item -
4083 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4084 @item ~
4085 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4086 @end table
4087
4088 @tex
4089 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4090 @end tex
4091
4092 @node Infix Ops
4093 @subsection Infix Operators
4094
4095 @cindex infix operators
4096 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4097 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4098 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4099 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4100 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4101
4102 @enumerate
4103 @cindex operator precedence
4104 @cindex precedence of operators
4105
4106 @item
4107 Highest Precedence
4108
4109 @table @code
4110 @item *
4111 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4112
4113 @item /
4114 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4115
4116 @item %
4117 @dfn{Remainder}.
4118
4119 @item <<
4120 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4121
4122 @item >>
4123 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4124 @end table
4125
4126 @item
4127 Intermediate precedence
4128
4129 @table @code
4130 @item |
4131
4132 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4133
4134 @item &
4135 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4136
4137 @item ^
4138 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4139
4140 @item !
4141 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4142 @end table
4143
4144 @item
4145 Low Precedence
4146
4147 @table @code
4148 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4149 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4150 @cindex arguments for addition
4151 @item +
4152 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4153 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4154 sections.
4155
4156 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4157 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4158 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4159 @item -
4160 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4161 result has the section of the left argument.
4162 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4163 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4164 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4165
4166 @cindex comparison expressions
4167 @cindex expressions, comparison
4168 @item ==
4169 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4170 @item <>
4171 @itemx !=
4172 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4173 @item <
4174 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4175 @item >
4176 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4177 @item >=
4178 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4179 @item <=
4180 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4181
4182 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4183 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4184 perform signed comparisons.
4185 @end table
4186
4187 @item Lowest Precedence
4188
4189 @table @code
4190 @item &&
4191 @dfn{Logical And}.
4192
4193 @item ||
4194 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4195
4196 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4197 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4198 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4199 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4200
4201 @end table
4202 @end enumerate
4203
4204 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4205 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4206
4207 @node Pseudo Ops
4208 @chapter Assembler Directives
4209
4210 @cindex directives, machine independent
4211 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4212 @cindex machine independent directives
4213 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4214 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4215 in lower case.
4216
4217 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4218 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4219 @ifset GENERIC
4220 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4221 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4222 @end ifset
4223 @ifclear GENERIC
4224 @ifset machine-directives
4225 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4226 @end ifset
4227 @end ifclear
4228
4229 @menu
4230 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4231 @ifset COFF
4232 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4233 @end ifset
4234
4235 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4236 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4237 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4238 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4239 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4240 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4241 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4242 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4243 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4244 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4245 @ifset COFF
4246 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4247 @end ifset
4248 @ifset aout-bout
4249 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4250 @end ifset
4251 @ifset COFF
4252 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4253 @end ifset
4254
4255 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4256 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4257 * Else:: @code{.else}
4258 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4259 * End:: @code{.end}
4260 @ifset COFF
4261 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4262 @end ifset
4263
4264 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4265 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4266 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4267 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4268 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4269 * Err:: @code{.err}
4270 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4271 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4272 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4273 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4274 * File:: @code{.file}
4275 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4276 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4277 * Func:: @code{.func}
4278 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4279 @ifset ELF
4280 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4281 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4282 @end ifset
4283
4284 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4285 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4286 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4287 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4288 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4289 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4290 @ifset ELF
4291 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4292 @end ifset
4293
4294 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4295 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4296 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4297 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4298 @ifclear no-line-dir
4299 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4300 @end ifclear
4301
4302 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4303 * List:: @code{.list}
4304 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4305 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4306 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4307 @ifset ELF
4308 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4309 @end ifset
4310
4311 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4312 @ignore
4313 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4314 @end ignore
4315
4316 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4317 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4318 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4319 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4320 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4321 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4322 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4323 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4324 @ifset ELF
4325 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4326 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4327 @end ifset
4328
4329 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4330 @ifset ELF
4331 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4332 @end ifset
4333
4334 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4335 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4336 @ifset ELF
4337 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4338 @end ifset
4339
4340 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4341 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4342 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4343 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4344 @ifset COFF
4345 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4346 @end ifset
4347 @ifset COFF-ELF
4348 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4349 @end ifset
4350
4351 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4352 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4353 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4354 @ifset COFF-ELF
4355 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4356 @end ifset
4357 @ifclear no-space-dir
4358 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4359 @end ifclear
4360
4361 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4362 @ifclear no-space-dir
4363 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4364 @end ifclear
4365 @ifset have-stabs
4366 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4367 @end ifset
4368
4369 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4370 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4371 @ifset ELF
4372 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4373 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4374 @end ifset
4375
4376 @ifset COFF
4377 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4378 @end ifset
4379
4380 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4381 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4382 @ifset COFF-ELF
4383 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4384 @end ifset
4385
4386 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4387 @ifset COFF
4388 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4389 @end ifset
4390
4391 @ifset ELF
4392 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4393 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4394 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4395 @end ifset
4396
4397 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4398 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4399 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4400 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4401 @ifclear no-space-dir
4402 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4403 @end ifclear
4404 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4405 @end menu
4406
4407 @node Abort
4408 @section @code{.abort}
4409
4410 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4411 @cindex stopping the assembly
4412 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4413 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4414 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4415 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4416 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4417
4418 @ifset COFF
4419 @node ABORT (COFF)
4420 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4421
4422 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4423 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4424 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4425
4426 @ifset BOUT
4427 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4428 but ignores it.
4429 @end ifset
4430 @end ifset
4431
4432 @node Align
4433 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4434
4435 @cindex padding the location counter
4436 @cindex @code{align} directive
4437 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4438 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4439 required, as described below.
4440
4441 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4442 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4443 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4444 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4445 with no-op instructions.
4446
4447 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4448 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4449 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4450 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4451 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4452 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4453 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4454
4455 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4456 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4457 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4458 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4459 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4460 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4461 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4462
4463 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4464 strongarm, it is the
4465 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4466 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4467 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4468 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4469
4470 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4471 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4472 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4473 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4474 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4475
4476 @node Altmacro
4477 @section @code{.altmacro}
4478 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4479
4480 @ftable @code
4481 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4482 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4483 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4484 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4485 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4486 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4487 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4488
4489 @item String delimiters
4490 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4491 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4492
4493 @table @code
4494 @item '@var{string}'
4495 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4496
4497 @item <@var{string}>
4498 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4499 @end table
4500
4501 @item single-character string escape
4502 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4503 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4504 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4505 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4506
4507 @item Expression results as strings
4508 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4509 and use the result as a string.
4510 @end ftable
4511
4512 @node Ascii
4513 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4514
4515 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4516 @cindex string literals
4517 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4518 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4519 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4520
4521 @node Asciz
4522 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4523
4524 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4525 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4526 @cindex null-terminated strings
4527 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4528 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4529
4530 @node Balign
4531 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4532
4533 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4534 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4535 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4536 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4537 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4538 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4539 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4540
4541 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4542 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4543 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4544 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4545 with no-op instructions.
4546
4547 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4548 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4549 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4550 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4551 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4552 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4553 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4554
4555 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4556 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4557 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4558 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4559 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4560 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4561 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4562 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4563 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4564 undefined.
4565
4566 @node Bundle directives
4567 @section Bundle directives
4568 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4569 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4570 @cindex bundle
4571 @cindex instruction bundle
4572 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4573 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4574 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4575 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4576 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4577 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4578 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4579
4580 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4581 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4582 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4583 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4584 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4585 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4586 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4587 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4588 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4589 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4590 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4591
4592 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4593 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4594 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4595 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4596 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4597 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4598 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4599 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4600 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4601
4602 @cindex bundle-locked
4603 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4604 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4605 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4606 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4607 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4608 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4609 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4610 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4611 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4612 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4613 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4614 bundle size.
4615
4616 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4617 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4618 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4619 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4620 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4621 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4622
4623 @node Byte
4624 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4625
4626 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4627 @cindex integers, one byte
4628 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4629 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4630
4631 @node CFI directives
4632 @section CFI directives
4633 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4634 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4635 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4636 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4637 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4638 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4639 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4640 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4641
4642 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4643 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4644
4645 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4646 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4647 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4648 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4649 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4650 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4651
4652 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4653 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4654
4655 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4656 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4657 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4658 unwind entry previously opened by
4659 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4660
4661 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4662 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4663 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4664 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4665 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4666 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4667 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4668 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4669 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4670 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4671 no personality routine.
4672
4673 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4674 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4675 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4676 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4677 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4678 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4679
4680 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4681 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4682 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4683 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4684 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4685 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4686 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4687 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4688
4689 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4690 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4691 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4692 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4693 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4694 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4695 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4696
4697 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4698 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4699 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4700 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4701 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4702 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4703
4704 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4705 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4706 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4707 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4708 by a section directive.
4709
4710 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4711 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4712 @code{.p2align} directive.
4713
4714 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4715 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4716 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4717
4718 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4719 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4720 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4721 remains the same.
4722
4723 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4724 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4725 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4726 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4727 CFA address.
4728
4729 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4730 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4731 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4732
4733 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4734 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4735 CFA.
4736
4737 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4738 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4739 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4740 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4741 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4742 code it's annotating.
4743
4744 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4745 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4746
4747 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4748 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4749 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4750 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4751
4752 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4753 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4754
4755 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4756 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4757 i.e. no restoration needed.
4758
4759 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4760 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4761 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4762 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4763 the previous saved state.
4764
4765 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4766 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4767 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4768
4769 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4770 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4771
4772 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4773 SPARC register window has been saved.
4774
4775 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4776 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4777 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4778 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4779
4780 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4781 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4782 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4783 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4784
4785 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4786 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4787 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4788 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4789 or another register.
4790
4791 @node Comm
4792 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4793
4794 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4795 @cindex symbol, common
4796 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4797 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4798 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4799 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4800 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4801 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4802 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4803 using the largest size.
4804
4805 @ifset COFF-ELF
4806 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4807 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4808 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4809 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4810 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4811 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4812 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4813 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4814 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4815 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4816 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4817 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4818 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4819 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4820 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4821 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4822 @end ifset
4823
4824 @ifset HPPA
4825 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4826 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4827 @end ifset
4828
4829 @node Data
4830 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4831
4832 @cindex @code{data} directive
4833 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4834 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4835 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4836 to zero.
4837
4838 @ifset COFF
4839 @node Def
4840 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4841
4842 @cindex @code{def} directive
4843 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4844 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4845 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4846 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4847 @ifset BOUT
4848
4849 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4850 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4851 but ignored.
4852 @end ifset
4853 @end ifset
4854
4855 @ifset aout-bout
4856 @node Desc
4857 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4858
4859 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4860 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4861 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4862 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4863 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4864
4865 @ifset COFF
4866 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4867 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4868 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4869 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4870 @end ifset
4871 @end ifset
4872
4873 @ifset COFF
4874 @node Dim
4875 @section @code{.dim}
4876
4877 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4878 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4879 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4880 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4881 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4882 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4883 @ifset BOUT
4884
4885 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4886 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4887 ignores it.
4888 @end ifset
4889 @end ifset
4890
4891 @node Double
4892 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4893
4894 @cindex @code{double} directive
4895 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4896 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4897 assembles floating point numbers.
4898 @ifset GENERIC
4899 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4900 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4901 @end ifset
4902 @ifclear GENERIC
4903 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4904 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4905 in @sc{ieee} format.
4906 @end ifset
4907 @end ifclear
4908
4909 @node Eject
4910 @section @code{.eject}
4911
4912 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4913 @cindex new page, in listings
4914 @cindex page, in listings
4915 @cindex listing control: new page
4916 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4917
4918 @node Else
4919 @section @code{.else}
4920
4921 @cindex @code{else} directive
4922 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4923 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4924 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4925 was false.
4926
4927 @node Elseif
4928 @section @code{.elseif}
4929
4930 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4931 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4932 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4933 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4934
4935 @node End
4936 @section @code{.end}
4937
4938 @cindex @code{end} directive
4939 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4940 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4941
4942 @ifset COFF
4943 @node Endef
4944 @section @code{.endef}
4945
4946 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4947 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4948 @code{.def}.
4949 @ifset BOUT
4950
4951 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4952 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4953 directive but ignores it.
4954 @end ifset
4955 @end ifset
4956
4957 @node Endfunc
4958 @section @code{.endfunc}
4959 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4960 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4961
4962 @node Endif
4963 @section @code{.endif}
4964
4965 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4966 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4967 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4968 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4969
4970 @node Equ
4971 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4972
4973 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4974 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4975 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4976 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4977 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4978
4979 @ifset HPPA
4980 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4981 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4982 @end ifset
4983
4984 @ifset Z80
4985 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4986 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4987 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4988 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4989 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4990 @end ifset
4991
4992 @node Equiv
4993 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4994 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4995 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4996 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4997 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4998 undefined.
4999
5000 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5001 @smallexample
5002 .ifdef SYM
5003 .err
5004 .endif
5005 .equ SYM,VAL
5006 @end smallexample
5007 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5008
5009 @node Eqv
5010 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5011 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5012 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5013 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5014 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5015 value is taken.
5016
5017 @node Err
5018 @section @code{.err}
5019 @cindex @code{err} directive
5020 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5021 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5022 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5023
5024 @node Error
5025 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5026 @cindex error directive
5027
5028 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5029 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5030 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5031 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5032
5033 @smallexample
5034 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5035 @end smallexample
5036
5037 @node Exitm
5038 @section @code{.exitm}
5039 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5040
5041 @node Extern
5042 @section @code{.extern}
5043
5044 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5045 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5046 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5047 all undefined symbols as external.
5048
5049 @node Fail
5050 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5051
5052 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5053 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5054 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5055 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5056 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5057 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5058
5059 @node File
5060 @section @code{.file}
5061 @cindex @code{file} directive
5062
5063 @ifclear no-file-dir
5064 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5065 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5066 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5067
5068 @subheading Default Version
5069
5070 @cindex logical file name
5071 @cindex file name, logical
5072 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5073 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5074
5075 @smallexample
5076 .file @var{string}
5077 @end smallexample
5078
5079 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5080 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5081 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5082 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5083 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5084
5085 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5086 @end ifclear
5087
5088 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5089 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5090
5091 @smallexample
5092 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5093 @end smallexample
5094
5095 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5096 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5097 literal.
5098
5099 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5100 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5101 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5102 entries will have.
5103
5104 @node Fill
5105 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5106
5107 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5108 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5109 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5110 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5111 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5112 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5113 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5114 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5115 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5116 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5117 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5118 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5119 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5120 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5121
5122 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5123 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5124 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5125 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5126
5127 @node Float
5128 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5129
5130 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5131 @cindex @code{float} directive
5132 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5133 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5134 @ifset GENERIC
5135 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5136 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5137 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5138 @end ifset
5139 @ifclear GENERIC
5140 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5141 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5142 in @sc{ieee} format.
5143 @end ifset
5144 @end ifclear
5145
5146 @node Func
5147 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5148 @cindex @code{func} directive
5149 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5150 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5151 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5152 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5153 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5154 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5155 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5156 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5157
5158 @node Global
5159 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5160
5161 @cindex @code{global} directive
5162 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5163 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5164 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5165 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5166 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5167 from another file linked into the same program.
5168
5169 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5170 compatibility with other assemblers.
5171
5172 @ifset HPPA
5173 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5174 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5175 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5176 @end ifset
5177
5178 @ifset ELF
5179 @node Gnu_attribute
5180 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5181 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5182
5183 @node Hidden
5184 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5185
5186 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5187 @cindex visibility
5188 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5189 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5190 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5191
5192 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5193 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5194 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5195 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5196 @end ifset
5197
5198 @node hword
5199 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5200
5201 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5202 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5203 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5204 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5205 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5206 a 16 bit number for each.
5207
5208 @ifset GENERIC
5209 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5210 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5211 @end ifset
5212 @ifclear GENERIC
5213 @ifset W32
5214 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5215 @end ifset
5216 @ifset W16
5217 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5218 @end ifset
5219 @end ifclear
5220
5221 @node Ident
5222 @section @code{.ident}
5223
5224 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5225
5226 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5227 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5228 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5229 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5230 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5231 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5232 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5233
5234 @node If
5235 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5236
5237 @cindex conditional assembly
5238 @cindex @code{if} directive
5239 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5240 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5241 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5242 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5243 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5244 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5245 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5246 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5247
5248 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5249 @table @code
5250 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5251 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5252 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5253 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5254 is considered to be undefined.
5255
5256 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5257 @item .ifb @var{text}
5258 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5259
5260 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5261 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5262 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5263 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5264 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5265 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5266 string comparison is case sensitive.
5267
5268 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5269 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5270 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5271
5272 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5273 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5274 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5275
5276 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5277 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5278 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5279 equal to zero.
5280
5281 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5282 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5283 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5284
5285 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5286 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5287 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5288 to zero.
5289
5290 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5291 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5292 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5293
5294 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5295 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5296 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5297 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5298
5299 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5300 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5301 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5302 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5303
5304 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5305 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5306 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5307 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5308 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5309 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5310 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5311
5312 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5313 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5314 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5315 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5316
5317 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5318 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5319 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5320 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5321 @end table
5322
5323 @node Incbin
5324 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5325
5326 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5327 @cindex binary files, including
5328 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5329 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5330 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5331 around @var{file}.
5332
5333 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5334 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5335 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5336 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5337 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5338
5339 @node Include
5340 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5341
5342 @cindex @code{include} directive
5343 @cindex supporting files, including
5344 @cindex files, including
5345 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5346 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5347 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5348 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5349 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5350 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5351 around @var{file}.
5352
5353 @node Int
5354 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5355
5356 @cindex @code{int} directive
5357 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5358 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5359 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5360 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5361 of target the assembly is for.
5362
5363 @ifclear GENERIC
5364 @ifset H8
5365 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5366 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5367 32-bit integers.
5368 @end ifset
5369 @end ifclear
5370
5371 @ifset ELF
5372 @node Internal
5373 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5374
5375 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5376 @cindex visibility
5377 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5378 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5379 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5380
5381 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5382 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5383 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5384 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5385 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5386 @end ifset
5387
5388 @node Irp
5389 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5390
5391 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5392 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5393 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5394 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5395 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5396 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5397 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5398 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5399
5400 For example, assembling
5401
5402 @example
5403 .irp param,1,2,3
5404 move d\param,sp@@-
5405 .endr
5406 @end example
5407
5408 is equivalent to assembling
5409
5410 @example
5411 move d1,sp@@-
5412 move d2,sp@@-
5413 move d3,sp@@-
5414 @end example
5415
5416 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5417
5418 @node Irpc
5419 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5420
5421 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5422 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5423 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5424 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5425 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5426 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5427 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5428 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5429
5430 For example, assembling
5431
5432 @example
5433 .irpc param,123
5434 move d\param,sp@@-
5435 .endr
5436 @end example
5437
5438 is equivalent to assembling
5439
5440 @example
5441 move d1,sp@@-
5442 move d2,sp@@-
5443 move d3,sp@@-
5444 @end example
5445
5446 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5447 at @xref{Macro}.
5448
5449 @node Lcomm
5450 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5451
5452 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5453 @cindex local common symbols
5454 @cindex symbols, local common
5455 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5456 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5457 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5458 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5459 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5460 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5461
5462 @ifset GENERIC
5463 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5464 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5465 @end ifset
5466
5467 @ifset HPPA
5468 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5469 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5470 @end ifset
5471
5472 @node Lflags
5473 @section @code{.lflags}
5474
5475 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5476 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5477 assemblers, but ignores it.
5478
5479 @ifclear no-line-dir
5480 @node Line
5481 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5482
5483 @cindex @code{line} directive
5484 @cindex logical line number
5485 @ifset aout-bout
5486 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5487 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5488 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5489 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5490 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5491 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5492 @end ifset
5493
5494 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5495 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5496 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5497 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5498 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5499
5500 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5501 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5502 debugging.
5503 @end ifclear
5504
5505 @node Linkonce
5506 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5507 @cindex COMDAT
5508 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5509 @cindex common sections
5510 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5511 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5512 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5513 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5514 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5515 unique.
5516
5517 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5518 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5519 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5520
5521 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5522 following strings. For example:
5523 @smallexample
5524 .linkonce same_size
5525 @end smallexample
5526 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5527
5528 @table @code
5529 @item discard
5530 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5531
5532 @item one_only
5533 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5534
5535 @item same_size
5536 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5537
5538 @item same_contents
5539 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5540 @end table
5541
5542 @node List
5543 @section @code{.list}
5544
5545 @cindex @code{list} directive
5546 @cindex listing control, turning on
5547 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5548 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5549 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5550 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5551 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5552
5553 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5554 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5555 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5556
5557 @node Ln
5558 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5559
5560 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5561 @ifclear no-line-dir
5562 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5563 @end ifclear
5564 @ifset no-line-dir
5565 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5566 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5567 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5568 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5569 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5570 @ifset BOUT
5571
5572 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5573 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5574 output format.
5575 @end ifset
5576 @end ifset
5577
5578 @node Loc
5579 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5580 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5581 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5582 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5583 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5584 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5585 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5586 the row is added.
5587
5588 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5589
5590 @table @code
5591 @item basic_block
5592 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5593 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5594
5595 @item prologue_end
5596 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5597 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5598
5599 @item epilogue_begin
5600 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5601 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5602
5603 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5604 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5605 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5606 either 0 or 1.
5607
5608 @item isa @var{value}
5609 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5610 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5611
5612 @item discriminator @var{value}
5613 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5614 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5615
5616 @end table
5617
5618 @node Loc_mark_labels
5619 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5620 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5621 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5622 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5623 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5624 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5625 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5626 this function respectively.
5627
5628 @ifset ELF
5629 @node Local
5630 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5631
5632 @cindex @code{local} directive
5633 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5634 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5635 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5636 they will be created.
5637
5638 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5639 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5640 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5641 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5642 @end ifset
5643
5644 @node Long
5645 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5646
5647 @cindex @code{long} directive
5648 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5649
5650 @ignore
5651 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5652 @c what it really ought to do
5653 @node Lsym
5654 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5655
5656 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5657 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5658 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5659 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5660 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5661 the same as the expression value:
5662 @smallexample
5663 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5664 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5665 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5666 @end smallexample
5667 @noindent
5668 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5669 @end ignore
5670
5671 @node Macro
5672 @section @code{.macro}
5673
5674 @cindex macros
5675 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5676 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5677 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5678
5679 @example
5680 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5681 .long \from
5682 .if \to-\from
5683 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5684 .endif
5685 .endm
5686 @end example
5687
5688 @noindent
5689 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5690
5691 @example
5692 .long 0
5693 .long 1
5694 .long 2
5695 .long 3
5696 .long 4
5697 .long 5
5698 @end example
5699
5700 @ftable @code
5701 @item .macro @var{macname}
5702 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5703 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5704 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5705 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5706 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5707 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5708 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5709 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5710 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5711 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5712 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5713 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5714
5715 @table @code
5716 @item .macro comm
5717 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5718 arguments.
5719
5720 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5721 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5722 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5723 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5724 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5725
5726 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5727 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5728 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5729 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5730 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5731 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5732 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5733 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5734
5735 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5736 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5737 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5738 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5739 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5740
5741 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5742 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5743 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5744
5745 @end table
5746
5747 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5748 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5749 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5750 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5751 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5752 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5753 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5754 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5755 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5756 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5757 this macro definition:
5758
5759 @example
5760 .macro label l
5761 \l:
5762 .endm
5763 @end example
5764
5765 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5766 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5767 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5768 identifier.
5769
5770 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5771 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5772 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5773 length specifier like this:
5774
5775 @example
5776 .macro opcode base length
5777 \base.\length
5778 .endm
5779 @end example
5780
5781 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5782 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5783 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5784
5785 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5786
5787 @table @code
5788 @item Insert white space
5789 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5790 solution. eg:
5791
5792 @example
5793 .macro label l
5794 \l :
5795 .endm
5796 @end example
5797
5798 @item Use @samp{\()}
5799 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5800 the following text. eg:
5801
5802 @example
5803 .macro opcode base length
5804 \base\().\length
5805 .endm
5806 @end example
5807
5808 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5809 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5810 used as a separator. eg:
5811
5812 @example
5813 .altmacro
5814 .macro label l
5815 l&:
5816 .endm
5817 @end example
5818 @end table
5819
5820 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5821 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5822 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5823
5824 @item .endm
5825 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5826 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5827
5828 @item .exitm
5829 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5830 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5831
5832 @cindex number of macros executed
5833 @cindex macros, count executed
5834 @item \@@
5835 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5836 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5837 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5838
5839 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5840 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5841 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5842 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5843 @end ftable
5844
5845 @node MRI
5846 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5847
5848 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5849 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5850 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5851 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5852 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5853 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5854
5855 @node Noaltmacro
5856 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5857 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5858
5859 @node Nolist
5860 @section @code{.nolist}
5861
5862 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5863 @cindex listing control, turning off
5864 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5865 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5866 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5867 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5868 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5869
5870 @node Octa
5871 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5872
5873 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5874 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5875 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5876 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5877 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5878 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5879
5880 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5881 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5882
5883 @node Offset
5884 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5885
5886 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5887 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5888 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5889 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5890 directive.
5891
5892 @node Org
5893 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5894
5895 @cindex @code{org} directive
5896 @cindex location counter, advancing
5897 @cindex advancing location counter
5898 @cindex current address, advancing
5899 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5900 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5901 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5902 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5903 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5904 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5905 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5906 is the same as the current subsection.
5907
5908 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5909 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5910 backwards.
5911
5912 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5913 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5914 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5915 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5916 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5917 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5918
5919 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5920 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5921 people's assemblers.
5922
5923 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5924 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5925 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5926 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5927
5928 @node P2align
5929 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5930
5931 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5932 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5933 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5934 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5935 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5936 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5937 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5938 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5939
5940 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5941 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5942 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5943 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5944 with no-op instructions.
5945
5946 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5947 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5948 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5949 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5950 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5951 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5952 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5953
5954 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5955 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5956 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5957 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5958 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5959 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5960 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5961 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5962 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5963 undefined.
5964
5965 @ifset ELF
5966 @node PopSection
5967 @section @code{.popsection}
5968
5969 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5970 @cindex Section Stack
5971 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5972 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5973 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5974 (@pxref{Previous}).
5975
5976 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5977 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5978 stack.
5979 @end ifset
5980
5981 @ifset ELF
5982 @node Previous
5983 @section @code{.previous}
5984
5985 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5986 @cindex Section Stack
5987 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5988 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5989 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5990 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5991
5992 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5993 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5994 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5995 subsections). For example:
5996
5997 @smallexample
5998 .section A
5999 .subsection 1
6000 .word 0x1234
6001 .subsection 2
6002 .word 0x5678
6003 .previous
6004 .word 0x9abc
6005 @end smallexample
6006
6007 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6008 section A. Whilst:
6009
6010 @smallexample
6011 .section A
6012 .subsection 1
6013 # Now in section A subsection 1
6014 .word 0x1234
6015 .section B
6016 .subsection 0
6017 # Now in section B subsection 0
6018 .word 0x5678
6019 .subsection 1
6020 # Now in section B subsection 1
6021 .word 0x9abc
6022 .previous
6023 # Now in section B subsection 0
6024 .word 0xdef0
6025 @end smallexample
6026
6027 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6028 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6029
6030 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6031 the top section on the section stack.
6032 @end ifset
6033
6034 @node Print
6035 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6036
6037 @cindex @code{print} directive
6038 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6039 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6040
6041 @ifset ELF
6042 @node Protected
6043 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6044
6045 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6046 @cindex visibility
6047 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6048 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6049
6050 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6051 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6052 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6053 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6054 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6055 this.
6056 @end ifset
6057
6058 @node Psize
6059 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6060
6061 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6062 @cindex listing control: paper size
6063 @cindex paper size, for listings
6064 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6065 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6066
6067 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6068 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6069 default width is 200 columns.
6070
6071 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6072 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6073 @code{.eject}).
6074
6075 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6076 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6077
6078 @node Purgem
6079 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6080
6081 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6082 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6083 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6084
6085 @ifset ELF
6086 @node PushSection
6087 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6088
6089 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6090 @cindex Section Stack
6091 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6092 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6093 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6094 (@pxref{Previous}).
6095
6096 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6097 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6098 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6099 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6100 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6101 @end ifset
6102
6103 @node Quad
6104 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6105
6106 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6107 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6108 each bignum, it emits
6109 @ifclear bignum-16
6110 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6111 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6112 @cindex eight-byte integer
6113 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6114
6115 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6116 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6117 @end ifclear
6118 @ifset bignum-16
6119 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6120 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6121 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6122 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6123 @end ifset
6124
6125 @node Reloc
6126 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6127
6128 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6129 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6130 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6131 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6132 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6133 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6134 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6135 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6136 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6137 section.
6138
6139 @node Rept
6140 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6141
6142 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6143 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6144 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6145
6146 For example, assembling
6147
6148 @example
6149 .rept 3
6150 .long 0
6151 .endr
6152 @end example
6153
6154 is equivalent to assembling
6155
6156 @example
6157 .long 0
6158 .long 0
6159 .long 0
6160 @end example
6161
6162 @node Sbttl
6163 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6164
6165 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6166 @cindex subtitles for listings
6167 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6168 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6169 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6170
6171 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6172 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6173
6174 @ifset COFF
6175 @node Scl
6176 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6177
6178 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6179 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6180 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6181 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6182 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6183 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6184 symbolic debugging information.
6185 @ifset BOUT
6186
6187 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6188 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6189 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6190 @end ifset
6191 @end ifset
6192
6193 @ifset COFF-ELF
6194 @node Section
6195 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6196
6197 @cindex named section
6198 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6199 named @var{name}.
6200
6201 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6202 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6203 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6204
6205 @ifset COFF
6206 @ifset ELF
6207 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6208 @subheading COFF Version
6209 @end ifset
6210
6211 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6212 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6213 ways:
6214
6215 @smallexample
6216 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6217 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6218 @end smallexample
6219
6220 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6221 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6222 @table @code
6223 @item b
6224 bss section (uninitialized data)
6225 @item n
6226 section is not loaded
6227 @item w
6228 writable section
6229 @item d
6230 data section
6231 @item e
6232 exclude section from linking
6233 @item r
6234 read-only section
6235 @item x
6236 executable section
6237 @item s
6238 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6239 @item a
6240 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6241 @item y
6242 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6243 @item 0-9
6244 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6245 @end table
6246
6247 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6248 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6249 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6250 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6251 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6252
6253 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6254 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6255 @end ifset
6256
6257 @ifset ELF
6258 @ifset COFF
6259 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6260 @subheading ELF Version
6261 @end ifset
6262
6263 @cindex Section Stack
6264 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6265 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6266 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6267 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6268
6269 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6270 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6271
6272 @smallexample
6273 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6274 @end smallexample
6275
6276 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6277 @kindex --sectname-subst
6278 @cindex section name substitution
6279 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6280 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6281 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6282
6283 @smallexample
6284 .macro exception_code
6285 .section %S.exception
6286 [exception code here]
6287 .previous
6288 .endm
6289
6290 .text
6291 [code]
6292 exception_code
6293 [...]
6294
6295 .section .init
6296 [init code]
6297 exception_code
6298 [...]
6299 @end smallexample
6300
6301 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6302 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6303 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6304 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6305 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6306 macros just for that purpose.
6307
6308 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6309 combination of the following characters:
6310 @table @code
6311 @item a
6312 section is allocatable
6313 @item e
6314 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6315 @item w
6316 section is writable
6317 @item x
6318 section is executable
6319 @item M
6320 section is mergeable
6321 @item S
6322 section contains zero terminated strings
6323 @item G
6324 section is a member of a section group
6325 @item T
6326 section is used for thread-local-storage
6327 @item ?
6328 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6329 @end table
6330
6331 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6332 @table @code
6333 @item @@progbits
6334 section contains data
6335 @item @@nobits
6336 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6337 @item @@note
6338 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6339 @item @@init_array
6340 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6341 @item @@fini_array
6342 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6343 @item @@preinit_array
6344 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6345 @end table
6346
6347 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6348
6349 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6350 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6351 @code{%} character.
6352
6353 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6354 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6355
6356 @smallexample
6357 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6358 @end smallexample
6359
6360 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6361 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6362 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6363 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6364 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6365 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6366 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6367 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6368 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6369
6370 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6371 be present along with an additional field like this:
6372
6373 @smallexample
6374 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6375 @end smallexample
6376
6377 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6378 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6379 @table @code
6380 @item comdat
6381 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6382 @item .gnu.linkonce
6383 an alias for comdat
6384 @end table
6385
6386 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6387 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6388
6389 @smallexample
6390 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6391 @end smallexample
6392
6393 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6394 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6395 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6396 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6397 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6398 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6399
6400 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6401 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6402 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6403 executable. The section will contain data.
6404
6405 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6406 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6407
6408 @smallexample
6409 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6410 @end smallexample
6411
6412 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6413 separated flags:
6414 @table @code
6415 @item #alloc
6416 section is allocatable
6417 @item #write
6418 section is writable
6419 @item #execinstr
6420 section is executable
6421 @item #exclude
6422 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6423 @item #tls
6424 section is used for thread local storage
6425 @end table
6426
6427 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6428 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6429 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6430 work.
6431 @end ifset
6432 @end ifset
6433
6434 @node Set
6435 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6436
6437 @cindex @code{set} directive
6438 @cindex symbol value, setting
6439 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6440 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6441 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6442 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6443
6444 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6445 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6446 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6447 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6448 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6449 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6450 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6451 different symbols.
6452
6453 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6454 file is the last value stored into it.
6455
6456 @ifset Z80
6457 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6458 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6459 @end ifset
6460
6461 @node Short
6462 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6463
6464 @cindex @code{short} directive
6465 @ifset GENERIC
6466 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6467 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6468
6469 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6470 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6471 @end ifset
6472 @ifclear GENERIC
6473 @ifset W16
6474 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6475 @end ifset
6476 @ifset W32
6477 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6478 a 16 bit number for each.
6479 @end ifset
6480 @end ifclear
6481
6482 @node Single
6483 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6484
6485 @cindex @code{single} directive
6486 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6487 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6488 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6489 @ifset GENERIC
6490 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6491 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6492 @end ifset
6493 @ifclear GENERIC
6494 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6495 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6496 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6497 @end ifset
6498 @end ifclear
6499
6500 @ifset COFF-ELF
6501 @node Size
6502 @section @code{.size}
6503
6504 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6505
6506 @ifset COFF
6507 @ifset ELF
6508 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6509 @subheading COFF Version
6510 @end ifset
6511
6512 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6513 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6514 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6515
6516 @smallexample
6517 .size @var{expression}
6518 @end smallexample
6519
6520 @ifset BOUT
6521 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6522 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6523 ignores it.
6524 @end ifset
6525 @end ifset
6526
6527 @ifset ELF
6528 @ifset COFF
6529 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6530 @subheading ELF Version
6531 @end ifset
6532
6533 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6534 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6535
6536 @smallexample
6537 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6538 @end smallexample
6539
6540 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6541 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6542 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6543 symbols.
6544 @end ifset
6545 @end ifset
6546
6547 @ifclear no-space-dir
6548 @node Skip
6549 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6550
6551 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6552 @cindex filling memory
6553 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6554 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6555 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6556 @samp{.space}.
6557 @end ifclear
6558
6559 @node Sleb128
6560 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6561
6562 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6563 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6564 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6565 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6566
6567 @ifclear no-space-dir
6568 @node Space
6569 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6570
6571 @cindex @code{space} directive
6572 @cindex filling memory
6573 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6574 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6575 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6576 as @samp{.skip}.
6577
6578 @ifset HPPA
6579 @quotation
6580 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6581 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6582 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6583 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6584 for a summary.
6585 @end quotation
6586 @end ifset
6587 @end ifclear
6588
6589 @ifset have-stabs
6590 @node Stab
6591 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6592
6593 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6594 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6595 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6596 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6597 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6598 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6599 Up to five fields are required:
6600
6601 @table @var
6602 @item string
6603 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6604 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6605 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6606 using this field.
6607
6608 @item type
6609 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6610 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6611 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6612
6613 @item other
6614 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6615 low 8 bits of this expression.
6616
6617 @item desc
6618 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6619 bits of this expression.
6620
6621 @item value
6622 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6623 @end table
6624
6625 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6626 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6627 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6628 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6629
6630 @table @code
6631 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6632 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6633
6634 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6635 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6636 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6637 strings.
6638
6639 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6640 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6641 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6642 assembled.
6643
6644 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6645 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6646 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6647
6648 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6649 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6650 All five fields are specified.
6651 @end table
6652 @end ifset
6653 @c end have-stabs
6654
6655 @node String
6656 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6657 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6658
6659 @cindex string, copying to object file
6660 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6661 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6662 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6663 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6664 @cindex @code{string} directive
6665 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6666 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6667 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6668 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6669
6670 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6671 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6672 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6673 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6674
6675 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6676 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6677 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6678 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6679
6680 Example:
6681 @smallexample
6682 .string32 "BYE"
6683 expands to:
6684 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6685 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6686 @end smallexample
6687
6688
6689 @node Struct
6690 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6691
6692 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6693 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6694 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6695 @smallexample
6696 .struct 0
6697 field1:
6698 .struct field1 + 4
6699 field2:
6700 .struct field2 + 4
6701 field3:
6702 @end smallexample
6703 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6704 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6705 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6706 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6707 before further assembly.
6708
6709 @ifset ELF
6710 @node SubSection
6711 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6712
6713 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6714 @cindex Section Stack
6715 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6716 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6717 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6718 (@pxref{Previous}).
6719
6720 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6721 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6722 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6723 @end ifset
6724
6725 @ifset ELF
6726 @node Symver
6727 @section @code{.symver}
6728 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6729 @cindex symbol versioning
6730 @cindex versions of symbols
6731 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6732 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6733 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6734 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6735 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6736 shared library.
6737
6738 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6739 @smallexample
6740 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6741 @end smallexample
6742 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6743 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6744 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6745 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6746 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6747 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6748 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6749 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6750 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6751 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6752 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6753 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6754 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6755 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6756
6757 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6758 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6759 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6760 symbol table.
6761
6762 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6763 @smallexample
6764 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6765 @end smallexample
6766 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6767 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6768 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6769 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6770
6771 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6772 @smallexample
6773 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6774 @end smallexample
6775 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6776 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6777 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6778 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6779 @end ifset
6780
6781 @ifset COFF
6782 @node Tag
6783 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6784
6785 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6786 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6787 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6788 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6789 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6790 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6791 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6792 @ifset BOUT
6793
6794 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6795 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6796 ignores it.
6797 @end ifset
6798 @end ifset
6799
6800 @node Text
6801 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6802
6803 @cindex @code{text} directive
6804 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6805 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6806 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6807 is used.
6808
6809 @node Title
6810 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6811
6812 @cindex @code{title} directive
6813 @cindex listing control: title line
6814 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6815 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6816
6817 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6818 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6819
6820 @ifset COFF-ELF
6821 @node Type
6822 @section @code{.type}
6823
6824 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6825
6826 @ifset COFF
6827 @ifset ELF
6828 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6829 @subheading COFF Version
6830 @end ifset
6831
6832 @cindex COFF symbol type
6833 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6834 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6835 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6836 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6837
6838 @smallexample
6839 .type @var{int}
6840 @end smallexample
6841
6842 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6843 entry.
6844
6845 @ifset BOUT
6846 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6847 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6848 directive but ignores it.
6849 @end ifset
6850 @end ifset
6851
6852 @ifset ELF
6853 @ifset COFF
6854 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6855 @subheading ELF Version
6856 @end ifset
6857
6858 @cindex ELF symbol type
6859 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6860 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6861 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6862
6863 @smallexample
6864 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6865 @end smallexample
6866
6867 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6868 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6869 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6870 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6871
6872 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6873 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6874 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6875 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6876 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6877 assemblers.
6878
6879 The syntaxes supported are:
6880
6881 @smallexample
6882 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6883 .type <name>,#<type>
6884 .type <name>,@@<type>
6885 .type <name>,%<type>
6886 .type <name>,"<type>"
6887 @end smallexample
6888
6889 The types supported are:
6890
6891 @table @gcctabopt
6892 @item STT_FUNC
6893 @itemx function
6894 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6895
6896 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6897 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6898 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6899 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6900
6901 @item STT_OBJECT
6902 @itemx object
6903 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6904
6905 @item STT_TLS
6906 @itemx tls_object
6907 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6908
6909 @item STT_COMMON
6910 @itemx common
6911 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6912
6913 @item STT_NOTYPE
6914 @itemx notype
6915 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6916
6917 @item gnu_unique_object
6918 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6919 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6920 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6921 systems).
6922
6923 @end table
6924
6925 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6926
6927 @end ifset
6928 @end ifset
6929
6930 @node Uleb128
6931 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6932
6933 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6934 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6935 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6936 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6937
6938 @ifset COFF
6939 @node Val
6940 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6941
6942 @cindex @code{val} directive
6943 @cindex COFF value attribute
6944 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6945 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6946 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6947 entry.
6948 @ifset BOUT
6949
6950 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6951 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6952 @end ifset
6953 @end ifset
6954
6955 @ifset ELF
6956 @node Version
6957 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6958
6959 @cindex @code{version} directive
6960 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6961 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6962 @end ifset
6963
6964 @ifset ELF
6965 @node VTableEntry
6966 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6967
6968 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6969 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6970 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6971
6972 @node VTableInherit
6973 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6974
6975 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6976 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6977 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6978 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6979 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6980 @end ifset
6981
6982 @node Warning
6983 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6984 @cindex warning directive
6985 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6986 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6987
6988 @node Weak
6989 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6990
6991 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6992 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6993 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6994
6995 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6996 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6997 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6998
6999 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7000 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7001 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7002
7003 @node Weakref
7004 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7005
7006 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7007 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7008 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7009 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7010 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7011 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7012
7013 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7014 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7015 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7016 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7017 had the references to the alias removed.
7018
7019 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7020 within the assembler.
7021
7022 @node Word
7023 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7024
7025 @cindex @code{word} directive
7026 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7027 separated by commas.
7028 @ifclear GENERIC
7029 @ifset W32
7030 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7031 @end ifset
7032 @ifset W16
7033 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7034 @end ifset
7035 @end ifclear
7036 @ifset GENERIC
7037
7038 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7039 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7040 @end ifset
7041
7042 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7043 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7044 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7045 @cindex difference tables altered
7046 @cindex altered difference tables
7047 @quotation
7048 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7049 @end quotation
7050
7051 @ifset GENERIC
7052 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7053 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7054 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7055 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7056
7057 @end ifset
7058 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7059 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7060 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7061 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7062 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7063 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7064 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7065 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7066 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7067 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7068 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7069 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7070 @code{sym2}.
7071
7072 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7073 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7074 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7075 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7076 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7077 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7078 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7079
7080 @ifset INTERNALS
7081 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7082 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7083 assembly language programmers.
7084 @end ifset
7085 @end ifset
7086 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7087
7088 @ifclear no-space-dir
7089 @node Zero
7090 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7091
7092 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7093 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7094 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7095 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7096 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7097 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7098 @end ifclear
7099
7100 @node Deprecated
7101 @section Deprecated Directives
7102
7103 @cindex deprecated directives
7104 @cindex obsolescent directives
7105 One day these directives won't work.
7106 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7107 @table @t
7108 @item .abort
7109 @item .line
7110 @end table
7111
7112 @ifset ELF
7113 @node Object Attributes
7114 @chapter Object Attributes
7115 @cindex object attributes
7116
7117 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7118 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7119 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7120 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7121 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7122 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7123 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7124 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7125 newer generation at run-time.
7126
7127 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7128 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7129 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7130 correctly.
7131
7132 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7133 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7134 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7135 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7136 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7137 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7138
7139 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7140 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7141
7142 @menu
7143 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7144 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7145 @end menu
7146
7147 @node GNU Object Attributes
7148 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7149
7150 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7151 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7152
7153 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7154 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7155 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7156 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7157 architecture-dependent ones.
7158
7159 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7160
7161 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7162
7163 @table @r
7164 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7165 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7166 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7167 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7168 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7169 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7170 @end table
7171
7172 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7173
7174 @table @r
7175 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7176 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7177
7178 @itemize @bullet
7179 @item
7180 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7181 @item
7182 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7183 double-precision FPU.
7184 @item
7185 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7186 @item
7187 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7188 @item
7189 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7190 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7191 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7192 @item
7193 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7194 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7195 general-purpose registers.
7196 @item
7197 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7198 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7199 @item
7200 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7201 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7202 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7203 @end itemize
7204 @end table
7205
7206 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7207
7208 @table @r
7209 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7210 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7211
7212 @itemize @bullet
7213 @item
7214 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7215 @item
7216 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7217 @item
7218 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7219 @item
7220 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7221 @end itemize
7222
7223 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7224 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7225
7226 @itemize @bullet
7227 @item
7228 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7229 @item
7230 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7231 @item
7232 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7233 @item
7234 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7235 @end itemize
7236 @end table
7237
7238 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7239
7240 @table @r
7241 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7242 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7243
7244 @itemize @bullet
7245 @item
7246 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7247 @item
7248 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7249 @item
7250 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7251 @end itemize
7252 @end table
7253
7254 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7255 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7256
7257 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7258 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7259 mailing list.
7260
7261 @itemize @bullet
7262 @item
7263 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7264 @item
7265 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7266 @item
7267 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7268 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7269 @item
7270 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7271 @item
7272 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7273 @item
7274 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7275 @end itemize
7276
7277 @end ifset
7278
7279 @ifset GENERIC
7280 @node Machine Dependencies
7281 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7282
7283 @cindex machine dependencies
7284 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7285 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7286 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7287 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7288 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7289 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7290 optimization.
7291
7292 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7293 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7294 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7295
7296 @menu
7297 @ifset AARCH64
7298 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7299 @end ifset
7300 @ifset ALPHA
7301 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7302 @end ifset
7303 @ifset ARC
7304 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7305 @end ifset
7306 @ifset ARM
7307 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7308 @end ifset
7309 @ifset AVR
7310 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7311 @end ifset
7312 @ifset Blackfin
7313 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7314 @end ifset
7315 @ifset CR16
7316 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7317 @end ifset
7318 @ifset CRIS
7319 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7320 @end ifset
7321 @ifset D10V
7322 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7323 @end ifset
7324 @ifset D30V
7325 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7326 @end ifset
7327 @ifset EPIPHANY
7328 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7329 @end ifset
7330 @ifset H8/300
7331 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7332 @end ifset
7333 @ifset HPPA
7334 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7335 @end ifset
7336 @ifset I370
7337 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7338 @end ifset
7339 @ifset I80386
7340 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7341 @end ifset
7342 @ifset I860
7343 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7344 @end ifset
7345 @ifset I960
7346 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7347 @end ifset
7348 @ifset IA64
7349 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7350 @end ifset
7351 @ifset IP2K
7352 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7353 @end ifset
7354 @ifset LM32
7355 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7356 @end ifset
7357 @ifset M32C
7358 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7359 @end ifset
7360 @ifset M32R
7361 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7362 @end ifset
7363 @ifset M680X0
7364 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7365 @end ifset
7366 @ifset M68HC11
7367 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7368 @end ifset
7369 @ifset METAG
7370 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7371 @end ifset
7372 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7373 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7374 @end ifset
7375 @ifset MIPS
7376 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7377 @end ifset
7378 @ifset MMIX
7379 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7380 @end ifset
7381 @ifset MSP430
7382 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7383 @end ifset
7384 @ifset NDS32
7385 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7386 @end ifset
7387 @ifset NIOSII
7388 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7389 @end ifset
7390 @ifset NS32K
7391 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7392 @end ifset
7393 @ifset PDP11
7394 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7395 @end ifset
7396 @ifset PJ
7397 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7398 @end ifset
7399 @ifset PPC
7400 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7401 @end ifset
7402 @ifset RL78
7403 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7404 @end ifset
7405 @ifset RX
7406 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7407 @end ifset
7408 @ifset S390
7409 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7410 @end ifset
7411 @ifset SCORE
7412 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7413 @end ifset
7414 @ifset SH
7415 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7416 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7417 @end ifset
7418 @ifset SPARC
7419 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7420 @end ifset
7421 @ifset TIC54X
7422 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7423 @end ifset
7424 @ifset TIC6X
7425 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7426 @end ifset
7427 @ifset TILEGX
7428 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7429 @end ifset
7430 @ifset TILEPRO
7431 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7432 @end ifset
7433 @ifset V850
7434 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7435 @end ifset
7436 @ifset VAX
7437 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7438 @end ifset
7439 @ifset VISIUM
7440 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7441 @end ifset
7442 @ifset XGATE
7443 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7444 @end ifset
7445 @ifset XSTORMY16
7446 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7447 @end ifset
7448 @ifset XTENSA
7449 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7450 @end ifset
7451 @ifset Z80
7452 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7453 @end ifset
7454 @ifset Z8000
7455 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7456 @end ifset
7457 @end menu
7458
7459 @lowersections
7460 @end ifset
7461
7462 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7463 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7464 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7465 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7466 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7467 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7468 @c in both conditional blocks.
7469
7470 @ifset AARCH64
7471 @include c-aarch64.texi
7472 @end ifset
7473
7474 @ifset ALPHA
7475 @include c-alpha.texi
7476 @end ifset
7477
7478 @ifset ARC
7479 @include c-arc.texi
7480 @end ifset
7481
7482 @ifset ARM
7483 @include c-arm.texi
7484 @end ifset
7485
7486 @ifset AVR
7487 @include c-avr.texi
7488 @end ifset
7489
7490 @ifset Blackfin
7491 @include c-bfin.texi
7492 @end ifset
7493
7494 @ifset CR16
7495 @include c-cr16.texi
7496 @end ifset
7497
7498 @ifset CRIS
7499 @include c-cris.texi
7500 @end ifset
7501
7502 @ifset Renesas-all
7503 @ifclear GENERIC
7504 @node Machine Dependencies
7505 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7506
7507 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7508 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7509 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7510 family.
7511
7512 @menu
7513 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7514 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7515 @end menu
7516 @lowersections
7517 @end ifclear
7518 @end ifset
7519
7520 @ifset D10V
7521 @include c-d10v.texi
7522 @end ifset
7523
7524 @ifset D30V
7525 @include c-d30v.texi
7526 @end ifset
7527
7528 @ifset EPIPHANY
7529 @include c-epiphany.texi
7530 @end ifset
7531
7532 @ifset H8/300
7533 @include c-h8300.texi
7534 @end ifset
7535
7536 @ifset HPPA
7537 @include c-hppa.texi
7538 @end ifset
7539
7540 @ifset I370
7541 @include c-i370.texi
7542 @end ifset
7543
7544 @ifset I80386
7545 @include c-i386.texi
7546 @end ifset
7547
7548 @ifset I860
7549 @include c-i860.texi
7550 @end ifset
7551
7552 @ifset I960
7553 @include c-i960.texi
7554 @end ifset
7555
7556 @ifset IA64
7557 @include c-ia64.texi
7558 @end ifset
7559
7560 @ifset IP2K
7561 @include c-ip2k.texi
7562 @end ifset
7563
7564 @ifset LM32
7565 @include c-lm32.texi
7566 @end ifset
7567
7568 @ifset M32C
7569 @include c-m32c.texi
7570 @end ifset
7571
7572 @ifset M32R
7573 @include c-m32r.texi
7574 @end ifset
7575
7576 @ifset M680X0
7577 @include c-m68k.texi
7578 @end ifset
7579
7580 @ifset M68HC11
7581 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7582 @end ifset
7583
7584 @ifset METAG
7585 @include c-metag.texi
7586 @end ifset
7587
7588 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7589 @include c-microblaze.texi
7590 @end ifset
7591
7592 @ifset MIPS
7593 @include c-mips.texi
7594 @end ifset
7595
7596 @ifset MMIX
7597 @include c-mmix.texi
7598 @end ifset
7599
7600 @ifset MSP430
7601 @include c-msp430.texi
7602 @end ifset
7603
7604 @ifset NDS32
7605 @include c-nds32.texi
7606 @end ifset
7607
7608 @ifset NIOSII
7609 @include c-nios2.texi
7610 @end ifset
7611
7612 @ifset NS32K
7613 @include c-ns32k.texi
7614 @end ifset
7615
7616 @ifset PDP11
7617 @include c-pdp11.texi
7618 @end ifset
7619
7620 @ifset PJ
7621 @include c-pj.texi
7622 @end ifset
7623
7624 @ifset PPC
7625 @include c-ppc.texi
7626 @end ifset
7627
7628 @ifset RL78
7629 @include c-rl78.texi
7630 @end ifset
7631
7632 @ifset RX
7633 @include c-rx.texi
7634 @end ifset
7635
7636 @ifset S390
7637 @include c-s390.texi
7638 @end ifset
7639
7640 @ifset SCORE
7641 @include c-score.texi
7642 @end ifset
7643
7644 @ifset SH
7645 @include c-sh.texi
7646 @include c-sh64.texi
7647 @end ifset
7648
7649 @ifset SPARC
7650 @include c-sparc.texi
7651 @end ifset
7652
7653 @ifset TIC54X
7654 @include c-tic54x.texi
7655 @end ifset
7656
7657 @ifset TIC6X
7658 @include c-tic6x.texi
7659 @end ifset
7660
7661 @ifset TILEGX
7662 @include c-tilegx.texi
7663 @end ifset
7664
7665 @ifset TILEPRO
7666 @include c-tilepro.texi
7667 @end ifset
7668
7669 @ifset V850
7670 @include c-v850.texi
7671 @end ifset
7672
7673 @ifset VAX
7674 @include c-vax.texi
7675 @end ifset
7676
7677 @ifset VISIUM
7678 @include c-visium.texi
7679 @end ifset
7680
7681 @ifset XGATE
7682 @include c-xgate.texi
7683 @end ifset
7684
7685 @ifset XSTORMY16
7686 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7687 @end ifset
7688
7689 @ifset XTENSA
7690 @include c-xtensa.texi
7691 @end ifset
7692
7693 @ifset Z80
7694 @include c-z80.texi
7695 @end ifset
7696
7697 @ifset Z8000
7698 @include c-z8k.texi
7699 @end ifset
7700
7701 @ifset GENERIC
7702 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7703 @raisesections
7704 @end ifset
7705
7706 @node Reporting Bugs
7707 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7708 @cindex bugs in assembler
7709 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7710
7711 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7712
7713 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7714 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7715 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7716 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7717
7718 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7719 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7720
7721 @menu
7722 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7723 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7724 @end menu
7725
7726 @node Bug Criteria
7727 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7728 @cindex bug criteria
7729
7730 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7731
7732 @itemize @bullet
7733 @cindex fatal signal
7734 @cindex assembler crash
7735 @cindex crash of assembler
7736 @item
7737 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7738 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7739
7740 @cindex error on valid input
7741 @item
7742 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7743
7744 @cindex invalid input
7745 @item
7746 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7747 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7748 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7749
7750 @item
7751 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7752 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7753 @end itemize
7754
7755 @node Bug Reporting
7756 @section How to Report Bugs
7757 @cindex bug reports
7758 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7759
7760 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7761 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7762 contact that organization first.
7763
7764 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7765 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7766 distribution.
7767
7768 @ifset BUGURL
7769 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7770 to @value{BUGURL}.
7771 @end ifset
7772
7773 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7774 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7775 fact or leave it out, state it!
7776
7777 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7778 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7779 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7780 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7781 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7782 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7783 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7784 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7785 and the most helpful.
7786
7787 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7788 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7789 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7790
7791 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7792 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7793 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7794 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7795
7796 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7797
7798 @itemize @bullet
7799 @item
7800 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7801 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7802
7803 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7804 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7805
7806 @item
7807 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7808
7809 @item
7810 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7811 version number.
7812
7813 @item
7814 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7815 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7816
7817 @item
7818 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7819 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7820 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7821
7822 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7823 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7824
7825 @item
7826 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7827 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7828 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7829 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7830 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7831 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7832 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7833
7834 @item
7835 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7836 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7837
7838 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7839 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7840 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7841 make a mistake.
7842
7843 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7844 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7845 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7846 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7847 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7848 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7849 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7850 observations.
7851
7852 @item
7853 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7854 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7855 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7856 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7857 by line number.
7858
7859 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7860 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7861 @end itemize
7862
7863 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7864
7865 @itemize @bullet
7866 @item
7867 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7868
7869 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7870 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7871 changes will not affect it.
7872
7873 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7874 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7875 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7876 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7877
7878 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7879 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7880 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7881 less time, and so on.
7882
7883 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7884 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7885
7886 @item
7887 A patch for the bug.
7888
7889 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7890 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7891 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7892 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7893
7894 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7895 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7896 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7897 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7898
7899 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7900 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7901 help us to understand.
7902
7903 @item
7904 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7905
7906 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7907 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7908 @end itemize
7909
7910 @node Acknowledgements
7911 @chapter Acknowledgements
7912
7913 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7914 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7915 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7916 @c (October 2012),
7917 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7918
7919 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7920 more details?}
7921
7922 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7923 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7924 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7925
7926 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7927 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7928 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7929 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7930 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7931 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7932 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7933 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7934 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7935 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7936
7937 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7938 in format-specific I/O modules.
7939
7940 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7941 has done much work with it since.
7942
7943 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7944
7945 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7946
7947 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7948 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7949
7950 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7951 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7952 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7953 support a.out format.
7954
7955 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7956 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7957 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7958 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7959 targets.
7960
7961 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7962 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7963 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7964 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7965 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7966 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7967 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7968
7969 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7970 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7971 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7972 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7973
7974 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7975
7976 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7977
7978 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7979 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7980 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7981 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7982
7983 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7984 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7985 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7986 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7987 and some initial 64-bit support).
7988
7989 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7990
7991 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7992 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7993
7994 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7995 flavors.
7996
7997 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7998 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7999
8000 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8001 configuration enhancements.
8002
8003 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8004
8005 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8006 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8007 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8008 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8009
8010 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8011 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8012 @include fdl.texi
8013
8014 @node AS Index
8015 @unnumbered AS Index
8016
8017 @printindex cp
8018
8019 @bye
8020 @c Local Variables:
8021 @c fill-column: 79
8022 @c End:
This page took 0.190956 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.